Page 1

R H HALL FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT CATALOGUE

RH Hall are a UK based manufacturer of bespoke foodservice fabrications. National distributor of all leading foodservice equipment brands & sole United Kingdom & Eire distributor for:

Providing Equipment Solutions for the entire Foodservice Industry R H Hall (Microwave) Ltd Hallco House Beacon Court Pitstone Green Business Park Pitstone Bedfordshire LU7 9GY Email: info@rhhall.com Telephone: 01296 663400 Fax: 01296 663401 Web: www.rhhall.com

Foodservice Equipment Catalogue Edition 25

EDITION 25


Contents PAGE

CONTENT

2-3 4-7 8-13

About Us Foodservice Solutions & Innovations Accelerated Cooking

9-11 12-13

14-26 15-18 19-20 21-22 23-26

27-37 28-29 30-34 35-37

38-41

Combination Microwaves, Commercial Microwaves, HSG & Other Equipment iWave Automated Foodservice Solutions

P2-3 P4-7 P8-13

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Ovens & Provers Steamers - Combination & Atmospheric Pizza & Potato Ovens Oven Ranges

P14-26

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Hobs & Induction Fryers, Pasta Cookers & Griddles Char Grills, Grills & Bratt Pans

P27-37

Specialist Equipment

39 40 41

Frima VarioCooking Center Electrolux Libero Front of House System Ovention & HSG

P38-41

42-47 48-68

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

P42-47

49 50-53 54-60 61-63 64-67 68

Hobs & Induction Fryers, Chip Scuttles & Pasta Boilers Griddles, Char Grills, Grills & Panini/Contact Grills Toasters & Conveyor Toasters Bain Maries, Cold Servers, Water Baths, Hot Dog & Popcorn Equipment Rice Cookers & Soup Kettles

P48-68

69-71 72-88

Outdoor Catering Food Preparation

P69-71

73-78 79-83 84-85 86-88

89-97 90-93 94-95 96-97

Mixers, Veg Prep Machines, Potato Peelers, Chippers & Food Processors Kitchen Blenders, Stick Blenders, Bar Blenders, Drinks Mixers, Ice, Juicers, Knife Sharpeners & Can Openers Slicers, Graters, Pasta Makers, Burger Presses, Mincers & Thermometers Vacuum Packers, Scales & Waste Disposal

Food Service Equipment

Hot Cupboards, Banquet Carts, Food Holding & Transportation Plate Warmers/Dispensers & Food Warmers Pizza Display, Lamp Units, Gantries, Carveries & Food Carts

98-99 New Covent Garden Soup Server 100-107 Display 101-104 105-107

P72-88

Ambient, Refrigerated & Heated Display Cabinets Serveovers, Patisserie Cabinets & Multidecks

P89-97 P98-99 P100-107

108-133 Refrigeration 109-117 117-121 121-123 124-128 129-132 133

Undercounter & Upright Fridges & Freezers Counter Fridges, Saladette, Pizza Prep & Counter Freezers Blast Chiller/Freezers, Chest Freezers & Ice Cream Merchandisers, Wine Coolers, Bottle Coolers & Frosters Mini Bars & Ice Makers Medical Refrigeration

134-137 Bar Equipment 138-153 Beverage Equipment 139-148 148-152 153

Kettles, Manual & Auto Fill Boilers Coffee Percolators, Coffee/Chocolate Machines, Coffee Espresso Machines & Grinders Water Coolers, Refrigerated Dispensers & Slush Machines

P108-133

P134-137 P138-153

154-163 Warewashing 155-157 157-160 161-163

Glasswashers Undercounter Dishwashers Passthrough Dishwashers & Cutlery Polishers

P154-163

164-167 Commercial Laundry 168-171 Hygiene, Storage & Handling

P164-167

169 170-171

Fly Killers & Hand Dryers Hand Wash Basins, Shelving/Racking, Platestackers & Display Baskets

P168-171

172-173 174-175 176-177 178-179 180

Commercial Cleaning Cash Registers Domestic Appliances Contact Us, Key Staff & Trading with Halls Index

P172-173 P174-175 P176-177 P178-179 P180

1


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

About Us

Welcome... We think it’s fair to say that there isn’t much we don’t know about catering equipment and the foodservice industry. Our considerable expertise has been built up from being within the business for almost 40 years. Today we are the largest foodservice equipment solutions supplier in the UK and we strive to be the very best, continually developing the products and services we offer, making us a truly nationwide ‘one stop’ catering equipment supplier. This growth has been achieved by listening to you, our customers, placed at the forefront of the market. We pride ourselves on understanding and anticipating the needs of our customers, providing catering solutions for tomorrow’s needs - today. R H Hall continues to work on evolving our products and services to ensure we deliver to your expectations - continuing to invest in our business and furthering our commitment to our customers.

Our philosophy is clear - to provide all sectors of the industry with an unparalleled premium buying experience - providing best name brands, an extensive product range, guaranteed stock availability and dedicated teams of knowledgeable staff to provide unbiased professional buying advice, all backed up by nationwide service, spare parts and technical support second to none. In all we represent over 100 top brands, equating to over 10,000 products, all available on a free next day delivery service. You can rest assured that when you purchase from us you get premium brands and a premium service - but without the premium price! We give you the very best buying terms in the industry, whatever the size of your order and you can be certain of no hidden extras our terms are transparent, they are what they say they are. You also get peace of mind - we have a nationwide network of R H Hall approved distributors, so no matter where you are there is one of our distributors nearby to offer you further sound advice, product demonstrations, immediate supply and reliable after sales service. Our professional team, both in house and within our network of over 1,400 nationwide appointed dealers, can offer unbiased advice to help enhance or expand a business, based on what we believe is the best and latest solution. And if there isn’t one... well, we’ll develop one! Our R&D team, based within our state of the art Development Kitchen, will work alongside each customer to develop a bespoke, unique solution creating a real recipe for success. Whether it’s a one off piece of equipment or a tailored roll out for a nationwide chain, we really are your ‘one stop shop’ for catering equipment - you need look no further. We can also draw upon expertise from the valuable relationships we have with our approved business partners. We are extremely proud to work with some of the best brands in commercial catering equipment - we are the Sole UK & Eire Distributor for Sharp Professional Microwave Ovens - and have been for over 20 years!

APPROVED DEALERS

OUR NATIONWIDE APPROVED DEALER NETWORK OFFER LOCAL SALES AND SERVICE BACK UP THROUGHOUT THE UK SUPPORTED BY OUR KNOWLEDGE AND CONTINUED INVESTMENT IN THE INDUSTRY.

OUR MISSION TO YOU

2

WE PROMISE TO: Listen to your needs and offer professional advice according to your catering requirements Work with you to provide solutions for future projects and concepts Provide you with the correct specification to cater for your immediate and future plans Meet your budgets, expectations and deliver on time Maintain equipment to ensure reliability and consistency Provide you with the ultimate foodservice buying experience


FABRICATIONS DIVISION

OUR 15,000 SQ. FT. BRITISH FACTORY IS FULLY EQUIPPED WITH THE LATEST MACHINERY, ENABLING US TO TAKE ON A NUMBER OF BESPOKE PROJECTS

DEVELOPMENT KITCHEN

THIS STATE OF THE ART FACILITY IS HOST TO PRODUCT TESTING, MENU DEVELOPMENT, TRAINING & INDUSTRY MEETINGS

We also work in partnership with a number of major food companies and suppliers to help us keep abreast of industry trends and maintain our position at the forefront of innovation. Our Development Kitchen was created specifically for this reason, allowing us to provide not just the right equipment, but a complete business solution too. This 2,500 square foot facility offers a valuable hands-on environment to develop new menus and concepts and plays host to many industry events including ‘Cook Live’ demonstrations and foodservice seminars - many top development chefs from around the UK have now experienced this centre of excellence. R H Hall is a firm believer in supporting the foodservice industry, both now and for the future. We support a number of professional bodies including the Craft Guild of Chefs, Microwave Technologies Association, Catering Equipment Suppliers Association, Cedabond, ENSE, Hospital Caterers Association and Health Estates & Facilities Management Association, as well as being approved suppliers for ESPO and NHS Supply Chain. We always advocate that you should select the best equipment you can afford - many cheaper imported products are flooding into the UK and it can be tempting to go down this route. But unknowingly to many, a lot of this equipment doesn’t reach any product conformity standards. We insist on this and urge you do too! In fact, our investment into the integrity of our products runs into tens of thousands of pounds a year - but we don’t pass this cost on to our customers, we absorb this operational cost into our business as we believe it has to be given to ensure we offer the best and safest products possible. We have maintained ISO acceditation since 1998 and all of our key brand products are WEEE, RoHS and CE compliant.

CUSTOMER SERVICE

OUR SALES & CUSTOMER SERVICE TEAMS EMPLOY A WEALTH OF KNOWLEDGE BETWEEN THEM, ALLOWING US TO DEAL WITH YOUR NEEDS QUICKLY AND WITH CONFIDENCE.

About Us

We also hold Exclusive Distributor status for Maestrowave Catering Equipment, Smeg Foodservice Ovens, iWave® Foodservice Solutions, Simply Stainless Modular Fabrications, Crown Verity Professional Barbecue Systems and the New Covent Garden Soup Server. In 2011 we formed our Fabrication Services division, operating from a modern and fully equipped 15,000 square foot British Factory and enabling us to offer a complete and extremely comprehensive Foodservice product catalogue. Our growing team boast many years of experience in all forms of metal fabrication between them. They also love a new challenge - all projects from small, to full product roll out are welcomed. Today, the majority of our orders are for bespoke projects and custom builds, with production built entirely to the customers specification. Our in house design department are able to take custom requirements and transfer these directly to the production floor for manufacture. We are also able to provide sample and prototype units before full production begins, ensuring every detail is as required. Whether your requirement is a bespoke stainless steel bench or a custom designed service counter, we can work with you to make your ideas a reality!

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

About Us

3


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Solutions & Innovations 4

Food Solutions & Innovations

Welcome to R H Hall Foodservice Solutions and Innovations, a creative and dynamic division formed in 2009, to provide bespoke and tailored equipment for any foodservice brand, concept, menu or operational need. By listening to the needs and desires of our foodservice customers, we can take a standard ‘off the shelf’ kitchen product and make changes to suit any environment. Working together we can create bespoke solutions which include any number of creative options - from new corporate branding, to specific automated cooking functions, to linking equipment with e-reporting systems - put simply, we can change the design and build of any foodservice equipment to suit your individual requirements and operational needs. With access to the most extensive range of foodservice equipment available on the market today, together with our vast knowledge and experience within this sector, this makes us ideally placed to offer this specialised service. Working in partnership with your own business and market expertise, we can create the perfect recipe for your business success. Our dedicated Food Solutions team work from our in house, state of the art development kitchen and can work closely with chefs to create new menus, adapt recipes and create perfect equipment timings to enhance cooking results. Partnering this with our UK based Fabrications Division, we are able to take on even the biggest challenges - from concept, to design, to complete roll out of the finished product. Day to day operational peace of mind is offered through the R H Hall nationwide network of approved distributors, so no matter where your business is, there will be a distributor nearby to offer you extensive and reliable after sales service, supported by our knowledgeable in house Customer Service team. The next few pages show just a few examples of how our creative solutions have been successfully employed by a number of major foodservice chains and operators. So for all of your bespoke foodservice solutions needs, give us a call... Why not make our next big challenge one of yours!


Food Solutions & Innovations

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Food Solutions & Innovations

5


6

Food Solutions & Innovations For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Solutions & Innovations


Food Solutions & Innovations

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Food Solutions & Innovations

7


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Accelerated Cooking

Buying Guide

Accelerated cooking equipment has revolutionised kitchen service, helping to lighten the load and increase throughput without sacrificing food quality. This equipment has also helped to open up whole new menus to many establishments, allowing for greater variety and adaptability of dishes. Most accelerated cooking appliances are based on microwave technology, and the commercial microwave and combination microwave lead the way. However, developments in technology make these machines capable of far more than just defrosting and heating. In fact combination microwaves can now perform almost every cooking requirement a kitchen needs in one compact table top appliance and with the option of pre-programmable menus on most ovens, sophisticated and consistent results can be achieved in both skilled and non-skilled operations. For rapid defrosting and reheating of foods, microwaves are the answer and as you will see with our Sharp range, there are a variety of power options, from light duty for lower volumes to extra heavy duty for prolonged use. Combination microwaves are your choice if you wish to reheat and cook foods. They capture the speed of microwave cooking, but give the cooked appearance of convection. There is very little you can’t cook in combi’s - the Maestrowave Combi Chef 7 for example, can operate in a veritable combination of modes: bake, roast, grill, steam, defrost, regenerate, microwave, boil or simply keep food warm. New innovations in this category include High Speed Grills which use microwave technology for optimum speed and performance - and the revolutionary iWave automated food system with barcode reader technology for heating pre-packaged foods.

Advantages & Key Benefits • Offers all types of foodservice operations greater speed, flexibility, versatility and efficiencies, regardless of menu offering, cooking style and throughput. • Pre-set menu facilities eliminate the need for lengthy manual cooking processes, saving energy, reducing wastage and guaranteeing excellent results every time. And with menu creation software, centrally developed menus can be easily deployed to remote multiple sites. • With speed and ease of use, food can be offered outside usual service times, by unskilled staff, increasing revenue streams beyond existing ones.

Buying Tips By choosing the right model you can expect a lifetime of between 3-5 years, even in the busiest environments. • Power output – choose the right power level based upon throughput, menu and type of operation – be realistic what you will use it for, now and in the future. Don’t under or over specify – insufficient power can lead to delays and too high can make it difficult to judge timings of smaller portions and possibly overcooking and wastage. Oven wattage determines the maximum speed of the reheat or cooking process. Minimum output for commercial use should be 1000W. • Build quality and reliability – Choose the best you can afford. Look for leading brands with an established reputation for quality, reliability and current technology. Don’t go for cheap imports or domestic models. Genuine service back-up and warranties are crucial. • Operational features – Built in features to look for that save time and energy include: Programmable models - useful to reduce errors and wastage; variable power, ideal for denser food products; in microwaves, the double quantity facility will calculate multi portion cooking requirements automatically; in combi’s, the rapid cool down facility is invaluable when switching between modes. We are also able to offer 60hz machines for offshore use - Ask our Sales Team for details.

8

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


E3XE

COMBI CHEF 7

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Combination Microwaves

• 700W microwave output • easyTOUCH icon driven touch screen controls • USB data transfer of up to 1024 programs • External Dimensions: 598 W 622 D 551 H • On Site Warranty

The Combi Chef 7 is able to operate in a combination of modes, making it the most flexible, efficient & easy to use oven yet. Bake, roast, grill, steam, defrost, regenerate, microwave, boil or simply keep food warm - this oven can do it all! Featuring Menu Creator 2.0™ software, which is extremely easy to use, a total of 11 cooking modes can be used to achieve outstanding results at the touch of a button. Up to 99 menus can be pre-programmed to ensure consistency time after time. To see the full power of this oven, watch our video at www.rhhall.com

• 1000W microwave output • easyTOUCH icon driven touch screen controls • USB data transfer of up to 1024 programs • External Dimensions: 598 W 622 D 551 H • On Site Warranty

• 1150W microwave output • SD memory card included • External Dimensions: 600 W 484 D 383 H

E3CEE

E4

E5

• 700W microwave output • easyTOUCH icon touch controls • In built catalytic converter • External Dimensions: 598 W 622 D 551 H • On Site Warranty

• 1500W microwave output • easyTOUCH icon touch controls • In built catalytic converter • External Dimensions: 584 W 750 D 591 H • On Site Warranty

• 1400W microwave output • easyTOUCH icon touch controls • 2/3 GN capacity • External Dimensions: 712 W 705 D 642 H • On Site Warranty

NEC1275

SOTAi1

TORNADO2

• 1150W microwave output • Touch Controls with 99 presets • 6 power levels • External Dimensions: 600 W 484 D 383 H • On Site Warranty

• Up to 256 unique recipe settings • Menu control via manual entry, SD card or USB • Serve hot food with minimal wait times • External Dimensions: 406 W 757 D 635 H • On Site Warranty

• Up to 128 unique recipe settings • Menu control via manual entry or SD card • Consistent results • External Dimensions: 660 W 653 D 483 H • On Site Warranty

• Unique menu creator V2.0 software included • 1800W variable grill • 100-250°C convection oven • On Site Warranty

Accelerated Cooking

E3XX

9


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Accelerated Cooking

Commercial Microwaves & HSG High Speed Grill MW10

R21AT

NE1027

• Unique microwave distribution & cavity • Perfect results every time! • 1000W output • Touch controls with 20 presets • External Dimensions: 490 W 460 D 320 H • NB. 1 Year On Site - 3 Year Magnetron

• 1000W output • Touch controls with 20 presets • 11 power levels • External Dimensions: 520 W 406 D 309 H • NB. 1 Year On Site - 3 Year Magnetron

• 1000W output • Simple to use dial controls • Fully variable power levels from 100-1000W • External Dimensions: 510 W 360 D 306 H • On Site Warranty

NE1037

CTMW01

MW1200

• 1000W output • Touch controls with 10 presets • 3 power levels • External Dimensions: 510 W 360 D 306 H • On Site Warranty

• 1000W output • Touch controls with digital display • 0-60 minute timer • External Dimensions: 511 W 421 D 285 H • On Site Warranty

• 1200W output • Touch controls with 20 presets • 11 power levels • External Dimensions: 520 W 406 D 309 H • On Site Warranty

HSG

M1425

• 1425W output • Digital touch pad control • Up to 10 programs • External Dimensions: 496 W 499 D 475 H • On Site Warranty

R22AT

This unique product uses microwave technology, infrared radiation and traditional contact plates to produce high quality toasted sandwiches 75% quicker than a standard panini grill - hot sandwiches in less than 1 minute. The top grill plate automatically adjusts to the product being cooked and opens when cooking is complete. Perfect for anywhere wanting great results, fast! Contact our Sales Team for information on our complete service, including demonstrations and menu development in our test kitchen, plus full installation and training. • Hot paninis in less than 30 seconds! • 4 preset programs • External Dimensions: 361 W 675 D 800 H

10

• Infra-red, contact plates & microwave heating • Electronic control with digital display • On Site Warranty

• 1500W output • Touch controls with 20 presets • 11 power levels • External Dimensions: 510 W 470 D 335 H • On Site Warranty


R23AM

R24AT

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Commercial Microwaves & Other Equipment

• 1900W output • Manual controls with digital timer • 4 power levels • External Dimensions: 510 W 470 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

Already the choice of a number of the UK’s leading operators, the R24AT is a true kitchen workhorse. With extra heavy duty construction and a huge 1900W output, this model is designed to cope with heavy everyday use. Easy to use, with 20 presets and touchpad controls, the R24AT is perfect for restaurants, pubs, fast food establishments, schools, universities, hospitals or anywhere requiring a tough, reliable and powerful microwave oven.

• 1900W output • Touch controls with 100 memory settings • 11 power levels • External Dimensions: 445 W 520 D 346 H • On Site Warranty

• 1900W output • 11 power levels • External Dimensions: 510 W 470 D 335 H

NE1853

NE1880

NE3280

• 1800W output • Touch controls with 30 presets • 15 power levels • External Dimensions: 422 W 508 D 337 H • On Site Warranty

• 1800W output • Touch controls with 16 presets • 4 power levels • External Dimensions: 650 W 526 D 471 H • On Site Warranty

• 3200W output • Touch controls with 16 presets • 4 power levels • External Dimensions: 650 W 526 D 471 H • On Site Warranty

CPS1A

MWB

SS28MW580

• Protects cavity from damage & food build up • Hygienic • Easy clean • For use with Sharp R22AT/R23AM/R24AT/R1900M • Exchange Warranty

• For machines up to 40kg • White finish on steel • Save valuable workspace • External Dimensions: W 356-457

• Top quality no. 4 finish • Suitable for machines up to 65kg • CAD/BIM drawings available on request • External Dimensions: 600 W 580 D • Lifetime Warranty

• Touch controls with 20 presets • Express defrost • On Site Warranty

Accelerated Cooking

R1900M

11


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

iWave Automated Foodservice Solutions 12

iWave Foodservice Solutions

Introducing iWave your 24/7 foodservice partner ®

t solution iWave from Maestrowave is the intelligen d, quality, spee e wher tion situa ice serv for every food are required. ing cook consistency, accountability and safe demands from the The system will meet any foodservice or restaurant. smallest operator to the largest chain tion suitable for • A fully automated foodservice solu s. food ient amb and n fresh, froze . • Ability to operate 24/7, 365 days a year . safe • 100% error proof, consistent and or nutritional • Menus can be tailored to any dietary needs. off a standard • A table top system which operates ly. supp 13amp plug conventional • Eco friendly – saving of up to 70% over ods. meth foodservice rol, cost, profit • Add ons include automated stock cont ring. onito e-m rint and carbon footp rammed as • The system can be built up and prog cater for to time any at to d required then adde can also be m syste The . ands dem ice all foodserv . converted for mobile operation an example of ® • The iWave mobile system trolley is can be. m how flexible and versatile this syste ®

wave.com

For more details, visit www.maestro


13

iWave Automated Foodservice Solutions

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Buying Guide

There are a whole host of options for ovens and prime cooking equipment, whether gas, electric, dual fuel or increasingly induction, the choice is wide, varied and really comes down to personal preference, space or budget restrictions, skill levels and type of operation and menu served. This equipment falls into various categories: oven ranges - with oven underneath & electric, gas, or solid burner top; combi steamers; electric and fan convection ovens, plus pizza ovens and even specific catering ovens such as potato bakers. The choice is comprehensive, but a versatile and flexible workhorse, able to make light work of the most demanding and varied dishes and respond to the on-going changing demands of an operation is vital, so without a doubt an oven that can ‘multi task’ in response to a changing menu will be a good investment. Compact ovens that can operate from a small footprint, or units that are stackable, are ideal for smaller operators. New models are now very energy efficient, helping to save on water, gas and electricity consumption whilst ensuring maximum performance. Equipment from the leading brands are very well built with extended warranty and regular maintenance intervals built in – both of which definitely help sustainability. With such a significant investment, a longer term perspective, looking at the whole life costs, is far more beneficial for a business and the environment.

Advantages & Key Benefits • Equipment is becoming more intelligent, with programmable models aiding efficiency and ensuring consistent results, leading to less wastage and even less staff interaction – bringing speed and reliability to any operation. • Features such as rapid pre-heat save on power and aid unit recovery after loading/unloading. Self-diagnostic facilities are built-in to some equipment which can detect any operational problems, again helping to keep them running at optimum performance and efficiency. • Models are now easier and more intuitive to operate through advances in technology – touch screen technology helps staff to navigate, whether skilled or not. • Compact models are increasingly available, allowing operators to cook a variety of dishes on a far smaller footprint, saving space and energy. • Combi ovens can cook safely at low temperatures and even overnight, so cheaper cuts can be used and joint shrinkage kept to a minimum - maximising yields and increasing margins. • Cook and hold features allow food to be cooked and then held at the required, safe temperature until required, providing for an efficient service.

Buying Tips By choosing the right model and maintaining it, you can expect it to last around 5-10 years. • Which oven? - Be clear on the intended use: the capacity and volume of throughput; the types of dishes to be cooked and by what method, considering future menu requirements too; variations and peaks in service times – maybe two smaller, versatile ovens will suit better; staff skill levels. Plus, space and installation aspects should be a consideration, some ovens may need hard wiring to a certain KW rating. • Build quality and reliability - Choose a leading brand with an established reputation for quality and reliability. Well-known brands usually offer the most innovative and technologically advanced equipment with intelligent features. Consider also the availability of spare parts and after sales service, plus what length of warranty is available. • Operational features - Go for an oven with a wide temperature range as this gives the ability to cook a wider range of products. Rapid pre-heat function enables fast recovery after loading/unloading. Easy control functions; auto power cut-out to save energy when not in use; preset or manual controls for ease of operation; cool touch doors; twin fans for efficient, even cooking; for combi steamers specifically, auto cleaning programmes and potentially a water softener if in a hard water area to help prevent breakdown due to limescale build up.

Make sure you know how to use your oven’s features to the full!

14

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


E22M3

ALFA43UK

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ovens

• 3 tray capacity (460 x 330mm) • c/w 3 racks • GN 2/3 compatible • External Dimensions: 610 W 608 D 552 H • On Site Warranty

Our best selling model, the ALFA43UK is the perfect oven for any small establishment or those looking to increase their oven capacity. With a spacious enamelled cavity which has space for up to 4 trays, this oven can turn out bread items, morning goods such as croissants or danishes, and snack items such as pizzas or sausage rolls, with top quality results throughout the day.

• 3 tray capacity (460 x 330mm) • c/w 3 racks • GN 2/3 compatible • External Dimensions: 610 W 642 D 607 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 435 x 320mm • Timer 0-60 min + manual • External Dimensions: 602 W 584 D 537 H

ALFA43GH

E27M2

E30M3

• 4 trays 435 x 320mm • 50-250°C temperature range • Timer 0-60 min + manual • External Dimensions: 602 W 584 D 537 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 tray capacity (460 x 660mm) • c/w 2 racks • 115mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 810 W 762 D 607 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 x GN1/1 tray capacity • c/w 3 racks • 100mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 810 W 616 D 625 H • On Site Warranty

E27M3

E28M4

CTCO01

• 3 tray capacity (600 x 400mm or 460 x 660mm) • c/w 3 racks • 85mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 810 W 762 D 607 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 tray capacity (600 x 400mm or 460 x 660mm) • c/w 4 racks • 80mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 810 W 762 D 662 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 tray capacity • 1/1 GN compatible • Internal light • External Dimensions: 800 W 600 D 580 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 50-250°C temperature range • Stainless steel door • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

E23M3

15


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Ovens V6

V6/F

V6F/D

• 4 shelf positions • 2 removable rod shelves • Powerful roasting oven • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 650 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 shelf positions • 2 removable rod shelves • Fan assisted for better heat distribution • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 650 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 shelf positions • 2 removable rod shelves • Fan assisted • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 650 H • On Site Warranty

ALFA43XE

ECO8

ALFA45UK

• 4 trays 435 x 320mm • 50-280°C temperature range • Timer 1-99 min + manual • External Dimensions: 602 W 584 D 537 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 shelf positions • Accepts 1/1 GN containers • Internal light • External Dimensions: 787 W 644 D 551 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 435 x 320mm • 50-250°C temperature range • Timer 0-60 min + manual door • External Dimensions: 602 W 584 D 537 H • On Site Warranty

E31D4

ALFA140UK

• 4 x GN1/1 tray capacity • c/w 4 racks • 80mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 810 W 616 D 625 H • On Site Warranty

ALFA45MFPGN

Perfect for baking and reheating, the ALFA140UK is designed to accept 4x 1/1 GN containers (or 600x400mm trays). This model also features a 50-250°C temperature range and 60 minute timer, plus a double glazed door and stainless steel interior. Designed to work with a standard 13 amp plug, this model can simply be unboxed and plugged in, so is ready to use in minutes!

• For 4x 1/1 GN or 600x400mm trays (optional) • 50-250°C temperature range • Stainless steel interior • Double glazed door • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H

16

• Single fan • Timer 0-60 min + manual • Fan oven ideal for baking and reheating • 2.75kW • On Site Warranty

• 3 trays 435 x 320mm • Timer 0-60 min + manual • Stainless steel side opening door • External Dimensions: 602 W 584 D 537 H • On Site Warranty


ALFA142XM

ALFA144XE1

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ovens

• 4 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Single fan • 50-250°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

Already used by some of the UK’s leading operators, the ALFA144XE1 has a proven history of success. Preset controls allow the oven to be programmed with selected menu items, ensuring consistency time and time again - even when used by unskilled operators.

• 4 tray capacity (600 x 400mm or 460 x 660mm) • c/w 4 racks • 110mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 735 W 810 D 730 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • 50-280°C temperature range • Stainless steel interior • Digital display • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H

• Twin fan • Timer 1-99 min + manual • Fan oven ideal for baking and reheating • 40 programs with pre-heat function • On Site Warranty

G32D4

ALFA143XM

ALFA143GH

• 4 tray capacity (600 x 400mm or 460 x 660mm) • c/w 4 racks • 110mm tray spacing • External Dimensions: 735 W 810 D 910 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Twin fan • 50-250°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Twin fan • 50-250°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

E33D5

ALFA144GH1

ALFA150

• 5 x 1/1 GN tray capacity • 85mm tray spacing • Digital time and temperature controls • External Dimensions: 610 W 680 D 730 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Twin fan • 50-280°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 780 W 715 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • 30-380°C temperature range • 1-99 min timer + manual • External Dimensions: 780 W 673 D 410 H • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

E32D4

17


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Ovens & Provers ALFA241XM

ALFA241VE

E35

• 6 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Twin fan • 50-250°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 871 W 832 D 832 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Twin fan • 50-280°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 871 W 832 D 832 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 tray capacity • c/w 6 racks 460 x 760mm • 60 minute bake timer • External Dimensions: 880 W 980 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

ALFA341XM

P8M

P10M

• 10 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Triple fan • 50-250°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 871 W 880 D 1125 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 tray capacity (600 x 400mm) • 76mm tray spacing • Dual function prover & holding cabinet • External Dimensions: 735 W 810 D 914 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 1/1 GN pan capacity • 74mm tray spacing • Dual function prover & holding cabinet • External Dimensions: 610 W 680 D 1015 H • On Site Warranty

E85/8

ALFA341VE

• Holds up to 8 trays (not included) • Independent heat and humidity controls • For use with E35 oven • External Dimensions: 880 W 880 D 902 H • On Site Warranty

Don’t forget, we have a wide range of Stands, Grids & other accessories

The biggest oven in the Smeg range, the ALFA341VE has a massive 10 tray capacity and accepts either 600x400mm or full size 1/1 GN trays. Preset controls and humidification feature make this oven hugely versatile and suitable for a wide range of foodservice situations. • 10 trays 600 x 400mm or 1/1 GN (optional) • Timer 1-99 min + manual • Stainless steel interior • Digital display • External Dimensions: 871 W 880 D 1125 H

18

• Triple fan • 50-280°C temperature range • 40 programs with pre-heat function • Humidified • On Site Warranty

Contact the Sales Team for details...


OG7502

G7SBW

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Steamers - Combination & Atmospheric

• 12 x 1/1 GN or 6 x 2/1 GN capacity • 6 shelf positions with removable supports • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 600 W 950 D 1600 H • On Site Warranty

The Blue Seal Savant range of Combi Steamers is perfect for users who aren’t looking for advanced electronic controls, but who wish to cook and program with simple and manual commands whilst maintaining the precision electronic controls provide.

• 12 x 1/1 GN or 6 x 2/1 GN capacity • 6 shelf positions with removable supports • Simple controls • External Dimensions: 600 W 950 D 1600 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Multi-point core temperature probe • 95 preset recipe programs • Electronic thermostat 30-300°C • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 875 W 825 D 820 H

• Manual controls with LED display • Two speed auto reversing fan • 99 free programs with 4 cycles • Internal light • 51,100 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

G3478

MVST

E7SBW

• 6 shelves supplied with 6 shelf positions • 0.18m³ oven capacity • Manually operated gravity drain • External Dimensions: 600 W 840 D 1590 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 grid capacity • In built steam generator • High limit thermostat • External Dimensions: 600 W 710 D 1709 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Manual controls with LED display • Multi-point core temperature probe • External Dimensions: 875 W 825 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

267300

SCC61E

SCC61G

• 6 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Air O Clean feature • Convection 300°C • External Dimensions: 898 W 915 D 808 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 847 W 771 D 782 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 847 W 771 D 782 H • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

OE7503

19


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Steamers - Combination E10SBW

P268782

SCC101G

• 10 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Manual controls with LED display • Multi-point core temperature probe • External Dimensions: 930 W 825 D 1040 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • c/w stand, tray supports, fat filter & grids • Air O Clean feature • External Dimensions: 895 W 845 D 1080 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 847 W 771 D 1042 H • On Site Warranty

SCC102E

SCC102G

SCC201E

• 10 x 2/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 1069 W 971 D 1042 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 x 2/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 1069 W 971 D 1042 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 879 W 791 D 1782 H • On Site Warranty

SCC201G

SCC101E

• 20 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 879 W 791 D 1782 H • On Site Warranty

Contact our Sales Team for details of all available accessories & services - including installation, site surveys & training...

The Rational brand has long been synonymous with combi steam cooking and this very popular machine makes large scale catering easy. To see the full scope of what the Rational SCC range can do, we recommend one of the regular ‘Cook Live’ demonstrations, which are held at our HQ Development Kitchen. Contact our Sales Team for details of the next event. • 10 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • HiDensityControl® for highest food quality • External Dimensions: 847 W 771 D 1042 H

20

• ‘5 Senses’ cooking system • CareControl cleans and descales • On Site Warranty


MEMT15070

MEMT29050

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Pizza Ovens

• 2 x 12” pizza capacity • Suitable for fresh & frozen pizzas • 2 x 13 amp • External Dimensions: 440 W 380 D 320 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 x 9” or 2 x 12” pizza capacity • Maximum temperature 400°C • Heat up to 240°C in 35 minutes • External Dimensions: 810 W 740 D 320 H • On Site Warranty

This twin deck pizza oven from Maestrowave offers fast cooking for fresh or frozen pizzas, with a fire brick cooking surface for authentic cooking results. Suitable for various sizes of pizza, the MEMT29050 is perfect for operators looking to introduce pizza to their menu. • 8 x 8”, 2 x 10” or 2 x 12” pizza capacity • Twin deck • 400°C cooking temperature • External Dimensions: 700 W 680 D 610 H

• Suitable for fresh & frozen pizzas • Fire brick cooking surface • Independent upper/lower elements • Workshop Warranty

MEMT29000

PO89X

PO430

• 4 x 8”, 1 x 10” or 1 x 12” pizza capacity • Suitable for fresh & frozen pizzas • Single deck • External Dimensions: 700 W 680 D 400 H • Workshop Warranty

• 8 x 9” or 4 x 12” pizza capacity • Maximum temperature 400°C • Heat up to 240°C in 35 minutes • External Dimensions: 810 W 740 D 565 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 12” pizza capacity • Maximum temperature 480°C • Heat up to 240°C in 40 minutes • External Dimensions: 966 W 1002 D 375 H • On Site Warranty

PO630

DB430M

DB830M

• 6 x 12” pizza capacity • Maximum temperature 480°C • Heat up to 240°C in 40 minutes • External Dimensions: 1286 W 1002 D 375 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 12” pizza capacity • 2 x thermostats 0-370°C • Safety thermostat • External Dimensions: 950 W 950 D 400 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 x 12” pizza capacity • 2 x thermostats 0-370°C • Safety thermostat • External Dimensions: 950 W 950 D 730 H • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

PO49X

21


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Potato Ovens KPOTS

KCLASSIC

VECTOR25

• 25 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 0-250°C • External Dimensions: 460 W 480 D 610 H • Parts Only

• 25 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 0-250°C • External Dimensions: 450 W 450 D 650 H • Parts Only

• 25 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 0-250°C • External Dimensions: 460 W 490 D 480 H • Parts Only

BAKEKING

KPOTL

VISTA60

• 60 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 0-250°C • External Dimensions: 500 W 580 D 750 H • Parts Only

• 50 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 0-250°C • External Dimensions: 520 W 560 D 810 H • Parts Only

• 60 potato cooking capacity • Fan assisted • Temperature range 50-250°C • External Dimensions: 490 W 580 D 815 H • Parts Only

KCOMBI

VS GAS

• 45 potato cooking capacity • LPG (bottle) gas only • 40 potato capacity in heated storage chamber • External Dimensions: 470 W 650 D 820 H • Parts Only

PS

Perfect for catering vans or food stalls, where size is key, this unit combines a potato oven with a small serving area - offering great menu potential in a compact unit. Store baked beans, sauces or soups in the bain marie, while your potatoes are cooking! There is even a small preparation area for serving.

• 25 potato cooking capacity • Temperature range 0-250°C • Integral 2 pot bains marie • Black or Stainless Steel • External Dimensions: 450 W 450 D 560 H

22

• Fan assisted • Illuminated display oven holds 25 potatoes • Potato preparation surface • 2.7kW • Parts Only

• 15 potato cooking capacity • 1000W oven • 2 x 1/6 GN bain marie • External Dimensions: 410 W 450 D 380 H • Parts Only


PEO1871

G504D

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Oven Ranges

• 2.9kW oven with 7kW 4 plate hob • 3 boiling & 3 simmering heat settings • 250°C oven • External Dimensions: 600 W 620 D 950 H • On Site Warranty

The Blue Seal Evolution range is a heavy duty modular system, incorporating all the prime cooking needs for any establishment. The G504D 4 burner oven range combines the essential tasks of oven and stove top cooking, with high quality build. The heart of any kitchen, a good quality range is a must!

• 3 x 1.5 & 1x 2kW elements • Mounted on E31D4 oven • Complete with 4 oven racks 530 x 325mm • External Dimensions: 796 W 600 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 7kW burners • Drop down door • 100-270°C thermostat to oven • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 915 H

P4BO

RG60

IR-4

• 4 x 5.77kW burners • 3.7kW side hinged oven • Castors • External Dimensions: 600 W 805 D 920 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 6.1kW burners • 6kW oven • 1/1 GN compatible oven • External Dimensions: 600 W 805 D 940 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 4 x 8kW burners • 8kW oven with drop down door • Adjustable feet, splashback & shelf • External Dimensions: 610 W 733 D 1435 H • On Site Warranty

MVR4

OG7001

G54D

• 4 x 7kW burners • 5.6kW oven • 2 oven shelves - 2/1 GN compatible • External Dimensions: 600 W 710 D 945 H • On Site Warranty

• 6kW oven • 4 x 5.5kW burners • Temperature 120-280°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 737 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 7kW burners • 1/1 GN fan oven with 4 rack positions • Drop down door • External Dimensions: 750 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 1/1 GN oven with 4 rack positions • Flame failure • 118,500 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

E9311

23


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Oven Ranges CA90E6

P6BO

SLR9

• 6 gas burners • Electric fan oven with grill • Semi professional • External Dimensions: 900 W 600 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x heavy duty pan supports • Oven with 2 racks & 3 rack positions • Max temperature 240°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 805 D 970 H • On Site Warranty

• 7.8kW oven • 6 x 3.7kW burners • Vitreous enamelled cast iron pan supports • External Dimensions: 900 W 600 D 970 H • On Site Warranty

LMR9

UKCR9D

TITAN

• 9kW oven • 6 x 4.5kW burners • Cast iron pan supports • External Dimensions: 900 W 700 D 931 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 5.5kW Burners • 2/1 GN gas oven under • Side opening hinged doors • External Dimensions: 900 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 6.1kW burners • Oven temperature 145-290°C • 9kW 2/1 GN Oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 805 D 940 H • On Site Warranty

RG90DF

G750-6

• 6 x 6.1kW gas burners • Twin fan electric oven • 2/1 GN compatible oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 805 D 940 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

MVR6

Recently added to the extensive Blue Seal range, the G750-6 provides an affordable and reliable solution for medium sized operations. The 6 powerful burners are backed up by a large 2/1 gas oven, offering plenty of space for roasting.

• 6 x 5.8kW burners •130-270°C thermostatic control • Double side hinged doors • Adjustable legs as standard • External Dimensions: 900 W 750 D 890 H

24

• 2/1 GN gas oven with 7.9kW burner • Piezo ignition to oven • 2 chrome oven racks with 5 positions • 147,250 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 4.7kW burners • 8.4kW oven • 2 oven shelves - 2/1 GN compatible • External Dimensions: 900 W 710 D 945 H • On Site Warranty


G3101

G528D

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Oven Ranges

• 6 x 5.8kW hob burners • Includes castors • 2/1 GN compatible oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 7kW burners • 2/1 GN oven with 4 rack positions • Drop down door • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

Built to the same high standard as the rest of the Evolution range - and fully modular - the G528D offers 8 cast iron burners and 2 full size 1/1 GN ovens, perfect for busy kitchens and larger establishments. • 8 x 7kW burners • Flame failure • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H

• 2 x 1/1 GN ovens with drop down doors • 100-270°C thermostat to ovens • 237,000 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

371173C

IR-6

OG7002

• 6 x high efficiency burners • Cast iron pan supports • c/w castors • External Dimensions: 900 W 730 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 8kW burners • 10kW oven with drop down door and 2 shelves • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 914 W 733 D 1066 H • On Site Warranty

• 9kW oven • 6 x 5.5kW burners • Temperature 120-280°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 737 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

G3101D

G56D

G3106

• 6 x 5.8kW burners • Includes castors & drop down door • 2 shelves with 5 positions • External Dimensions: 900 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 7kW burners • 2/1 GN fan oven with 4 rack positions • Drop down door • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 5.3kW burners • Fan assisted gas oven • Vitreous enamelled with 4 shelves • External Dimensions: 900 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

G506D

25


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ovens, Ranges & Steamers

Oven Ranges GE506D

E506D

E56D

• 6 x 7kW burners • 2/1 GN electric oven with drop down door • Flame failure • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 2.4kW open radiant elements • 2/1 GN oven with 4 rack positions • Drop down door • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 2.4kW open radiant elements • 2/1 GN fan oven with 4 rack positions • Drop down door • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

G508D

IR-8

GE508D

• 8 x 7kW burners • 2/1 GN oven with ambient storage to RH side • Flame failure • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 x 8kW burners • 10kW double oven • Adjustable feet, splashback & shelf • External Dimensions: 1220 W 733 D 1435 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 x 7kW burners • Electric oven with ambient storage to RH side • Flame failure • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

OG7005

G570

• Target top range • 9kW oven • 8.5kW central burner • External Dimensions: 900 W 737 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

G3107

For further versatility in large kitchens, a target top (or bullseye) range allows total precision when cooking and temperature can easily be controlled by moving food nearer or further from the centre. Complete with an oven below for finishing the cooking process, the G570 is also fully compatible with the modular Evolution range.

• Target top range • 2/1 GN oven with 4 rack positions • Removable centre ring • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H

### 26

• Dual ring cast iron burner • Drop down door • 80-300°C thermostat to oven • 72,500 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

• Cast iron solid top • 11.2kW burner • 7.8kW 2/1 GN compatible oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty


Prime cooking equipment generally refers to the larger, modular kit that is incorporated into a commercial kitchen as either freestanding pieces or form part of an in-line or island style cooking suite. This section includes, hobs, bratt pans, salamander grills, griddles/char grills, fryers, and pasta boilers – the equipment traditionally needed for high volume catering, although manufacturers are now offering compact versions and a choice of depths for medium duty usage in smaller kitchens. The range of equipment is extensive and apart from the obvious factors to consider, such as menu and covers, the final choice often comes down to personal preference. Some prefer to stick with the traditional, more familiar set-up of a gas range, with convection oven and bratt pans, whereas others might opt for the inclusion of more state of the art technology, such as induction hobs. Also, depending on the operation, individual cooking equipment may be required to accommodate particular food types, for example in ethnic cooking, a deep fat fryer is a must or in large volume production kitchens, tilting bratt pans for high capacity batch cooking. Whatever the selection, equipment that is versatile, used regularly and can cope with the rigorous demands of high volume production. Without doubt, most operations want to offer a varied menu, so cooking equipment that can ‘multi task’ and adapt to changes, will be a good investment, whilst saving kitchen footprint too. Some manufacturers are now combining various prime cooking functions into single multifunctional units – see our specialist equipment section for more information.

Advantages

• Multi-tasking modular equipment can help save space and allow chefs to control several cooking functions all close to hand. • Greater flexibility with increased choice of cook tops and bottoms, allowing operators to configure their own prime cooking requirements – even including refrigerated bases beneath hobs, so raw materials can be safely stored to hand in the cooking line. • Retaining the same modular range manufacturer will help with overall layout and usability of kitchen footprint, as all the units will match and ‘butt up’, giving clean lines, a better overall look and help with cleaning (eradicating dirt traps where opposing manufacturer’s units don’t fit well together). It also means one point of call is required for after sales service

Buying Tips • What equipment? This is very much dependent on the size of operation, the covers and menu on offer, including specific dietary needs, staff skill levels and speed of service, including any peaks. Consider kitchen size and existing equipment, plus any future plans for expansion or changes in menu and of course budget. It is more efficient to buy equipment that will be used on a regular basis and not stand idle. • Reliability & Durability - Buy the best equipment you can afford for your requirements, choose leading brands with a reputation for good quality and reliability. Be aware of energy consumption and look at running and whole life costs of equipment. Check the availability of spare parts and after sales service, plus the warranty period. • Operational features - Look for heavy gauge stainless steel construction with heavy duty hinges, cast iron burners, heavy duty knobs, ignition and flame failure protection, thermostatic controls, easy clean interiors. On fryers: powerful burners for fast frying, easy to operate drain outlet, lift out elements for ease of cleaning, thermostatic controls. For salamander grills: high speed infra-red burners for fast results, vitreous enamelled interiors. For griddles, look for plates with maximum heat retention. For bratt pans: 90° tilt for ease of pouring and cleaning; touch screen panels for simple, intuitive operation; pre-programmable cooking.

Our development kitchen showcases a vast array of cooking equipment and customers can see and try them out before making their choice. We have a development team too that can work closely with chefs/caterers to look at equipment and create new menus, adapt recipes and perfect equipment timings.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Buying Guide

Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty

27


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Hobs & Induction G512D-B

UKC6D

OG7003

• 2 x 7kW burners • Bench top model • Flame failure device • External Dimensions: 300 W 812 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 5.5kW open burners • Open cabinet base under • Castors to rear • External Dimensions: 600 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 5.5kW burners • Robust enamelled cast iron pan supports • Fully sealed hob top • External Dimensions: 600 W 737 D 325 H • On Site Warranty

G514D-LS

E514D-B

OG7004

• 4 x 7kW burners • c/w open leg stand • Rear castors • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 2.4kW open radiant elements • Bench top model • Easy clean & service • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 5.5kW burners • Robust enamelled cast iron pan supports • Fully sealed hob top • External Dimensions: 900 W 737 D 325 H • On Site Warranty

G516D-LS

UKC9D

• 6 x 7kW burners • c/w open leg stand • Rear castors • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

E516D-LS

The Blue Seal Cobra range is a fully modular cooking suite, providing a simple and effective system of cooking. Designed to be affordable, functional and reliable - and perfect for small to medium restaurants, cafes and takeaway establishments. Look out for optional fitted griddle plates to increase the versatility of your cooking surface.

• 6 x 5.5kW open burners • Castors to rear • NG or LPG

28

• Open cabinet base under • External Dimensions: 900 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 2.4kW open radiant elements • c/w open leg stand • Rear castors • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty


UKC9C

371021

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Hobs & Induction

G516C-B

Induction cooking is becoming increasingly popular throughout the industry due to its speed, safety and energy efficiency. This heavy duty, countertop unit provides a perfect solution for busy kitchens using induction on a regular basis, with 4 independent cooking zones for maximum versatility.

• 4 x 7kW burners • 300mm fixed griddle • Bench top model • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x independent 3.5kW induction zones • Overheating safety device • External Dimensions: 800 W 730 D 250 H

G518D-B

G518D-LS

G57-LS

• 8 x 7kW burners • Bench top model • Flame failure device • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 x 7kW burners • c/w open leg stand • Rear castors • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Target top • Dual ring cast iron burner • 900 x 625mm cooking area • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

IN512

IN514

• 2 x 270mm 5kW induction zones • Cabinet base with door • Adjustable legs • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 270mm 5kW induction zones • Cabinet base with doors • Adjustable legs • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

Looking for Medium Duty Equipment?

See our Back Bar section on pages 48-68...

• 6mm glass ceramic cooking surface • 14kW - 1 phase • On Site Warranty

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

• 4 x 5.5kW burners to LH • 300mm griddle to RH • Open cabinet base under • External Dimensions: 900 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

29


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Fryers 285557

SUPER EASY 211

EVO250

• 9 litre tank capacity • High productivity • Thermostatic regulation 90-185°C • External Dimensions: 200 W 600 D 930 H • On Site Warranty

• Single tank with 1 basket • Without filtration • 17-19kg output per hour • External Dimensions: 198 W 650 D 993 H • On Site Warranty

• Manual thermostat & timer • c/w primary oil filtration system • 9-10 litre tank • External Dimensions: 250 W 600 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

OG7110

G3830

IFS-2525

• Thermostat 130-190°C • Piezo ignition • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 300 W 737 D 1050 H • On Site Warranty

• 15 litre oil capacity • 32kg blanched to cooked chips per hour • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 300 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 93-204°C • Manual controls • 2 x 14 litre frypots with radius formed edges • External Dimensions: 394 W 762 D 1156 H • On Site Warranty

IFS-40

EVO400

• Manual thermostat & timer • c/w primary oil filtration system • 15-18 litre tank • External Dimensions: 400 W 600 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

EVO2200

Compact and affordable, the Imperial IFS-40 fryer is an efficient option for kitchens needing a stand alone unit.

• Thermostat 93-204°C • 22 litre frypot with radius formed edges • 2 large wire mesh fry baskets included • 105,000 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

30

• Manual controls • Large ‘cool zone’ • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 394 W 762 D 1156 H

• Manual thermostat & timer • c/w primary oil filtration system • 2 x 7-8 litre tanks • External Dimensions: 400 W 600 D 900 H • On Site Warranty


OG7106

GT46

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Fryers

OE7105

Part of the Blue Seal Evolution Series, the GT46 fits seamlessly with this extra heavy duty, highly versatile range. Offering twin tanks and a high output within a compact footprint, this fryer offers the perfect fit in a busy kitchen suite.

• Thermostat 130-190°C • Batter plate, drain tap, lid • 40kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 400 W 737 D 1050 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 145-195°C • 2 x 13 litre • Piezo ignition • Basket size 140 x 335 x 145 (x2 inc) • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H

• Drain valve & stainless lid • 31kg/hr output • Pilot & flame failure • Twin tank • 85,300 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

UKCF2

FF18

E3862

• 18 litre capacity • 25kg/hour production rate • Stainless steel open pan • External Dimensions: 400 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• 18 litre oil capacity • Single tank • Twin basket • External Dimensions: 400 W 735 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 litre oil capacity • 58kg blanched to cooked chips per hour • 130-190°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 400 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

G3840/F

371070

GT18

• 18 litre oil capacity • In built filtration system • 34kg blanched to cooked chips per hour • External Dimensions: 400 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• Deep drawn V shaped well • 2 x high efficiency 7kW burners • Thermostat regulation of oil temperature • External Dimensions: 400 W 730 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 100-190°C • Drain valve • 18 litre oil capacity • External Dimensions: 400 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

• Thermostat 130-190°C • Piezo ignition • 26kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 400 W 737 D 1050 H • On Site Warranty

31


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Fryers GT45

GT46E

E43

• Thermostat 145-195°C • Drain valve & stainless lid • 20 litre • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 88-193°C • Digital display with 3 timers • 2 x 13 litre • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 60-200°C • Drain valve & stainless lid • 27 litre • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

SUPER EASY 411F

Need Extra Prep Space?

SUPER EASY 422

• Single tank with 2 baskets • With gravity filtration • 34-40kg output per hour • External Dimensions: 398 W 650 D 993 H • On Site Warranty

• Twin tank with 2 baskets • Without filtration • 2 x 17-19kg output per hour • External Dimensions: 398 W 650 D 993 H • On Site Warranty

Find our Infill Benches on P45 OE7108/F

E44

• Thermostat 60-200°C • Drain valve & stainless lid • 3 phase • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

OE7113

The Opus 700 range combines heavy duty performance with reliability, accuracy and simple operation - the OE7108/F is no exception! Featuring a built in filtration system, cleaning and draining are quick and easy tasks, freeing up time in a busy kitchen environment.

• Thermostat 130-190°C • 45kg frozen chips per hour • Hinged element • 22kW • On Site Warranty

32

• Oil filtration system included • 35 litre • Removable basket supports • External Dimensions: 600 W 737 D 1050 H

• Thermostat 130-190°C • Batter plate, drain tap, lid • 65kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 737 D 1050 H • On Site Warranty


G3860

G3203

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Fryers, Pasta Cookers & Griddles

GT60

Part of the renowned Dominator Plus range, the G3203 Pasta Boiler provides a modular solution for establishments turning out large volumes of pasta, whilst remaining flexible enough to deal with bulk preparation or individual portions. Individual baskets are supplied as standard, for ease of use.

• Thermostat 145-195°C • Drain valve & stainless lid • 31 litre • External Dimensions: 800 W 730 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 16 litre water capacity • Thermostatically controlled • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 300 W 770 D 1193 H

371071

VMCP3

G47

• Deep drawn V shaped wells • 4 x high efficiency 7kW burners • Thermostat regulation of oil temperature • External Dimensions: 800 W 730 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 25-40 litre water capacity • 1 or 3 phase • Also a steamer, bain marie or poacher • External Dimensions: 350 W 550 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 40 litre water capacity • Piezo ignition • 4 x stainless baskets • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

GP513-LS

OG7201

OG7202

• 442 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • c/w open leg stand • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Independently controlled cooking zones • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 700 W 737 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Independently controlled cooking zones • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 900 W 737 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

• Supplied with three pasta baskets • Spark ignition • 68,000 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

• 24 litre oil capacity • 54kg blanched to cooked chips per hour • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 600 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

33


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Griddles G3441-FS

UKCT6

G55T

• 18mm polished steel plate • 395 x 485mm cooking area • 140-300°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 400 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• Open cabinet base with toasting compartment • Castors to rear • Adjustable front feet and rear rollers • External Dimensions: 600 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• 590 x 520mm cooking area • 16mm thick • Toasting compartment • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

GP514-LS

EP516-LS

GPE506

• 592 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • c/w open leg stand • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 892 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • c/w open leg stand • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 892 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • GN 2/1 electric oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

GP516-LS

EP506

• 892 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • 6.5kW GN 2/1 oven • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

GPE58

Showing off the full versatility of the Evolution Modular system, this extra heavy duty griddle features a large cooking area for fast moving operations. Available in a variety of sizes and power options, with a selection of base modules from countertop to refrigerated base.

• 892 x 530mm cooking area • c/w open leg stand • Thermostat • Piezo ignition • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H

34

• 20mm thick • Rear castors • Flame failure • Heavy duty controls • 78,300 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

• 1192 x 530mm cooking area • 20mm thick • GN 2/1 electric fan oven • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty


G592-B

G596-LS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Char Grills

G593-LS

Another addition to the best selling Evolution system, the G596-LS is part of a range of char grills in various sizes. The huge cooking area and massive 100,000 BTU/h output means the perfect steak can be turned out time and time again!

• Cooking area 442 x 500mm • No lava rock • Hi-Lo control to burner • External Dimensions: 450 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Cooking area 892 x 500mm • Individual Hi-Lo control to each burner • Stand included • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H

UKCB6

IRB-24

OG7401

• Mounted on open cabinet base • Castors to rear • Reversible top grates • External Dimensions: 600 W 800 D 1085 H • On Site Warranty

• Removable re-inforced cast iron radiants • 4 x individually controlled burners • Countertop • External Dimensions: 610 W 796 D 349 H • On Site Warranty

• Heat transfer channels • No lava rock • 615 x 485mm cooking area • External Dimensions: 700 W 737 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

G3625-FS

G594-LS

OG7402

• Cooking area 560 x 630mm • No charcoal required • 2 manually controlled burners • External Dimensions: 600 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• Cooking area 592 x 500mm • No lava rock • Individual Hi-Lo control to each burner • External Dimensions: 600 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Heat transfer channels • No lava rock • 765 x 485mm cooking area • External Dimensions: 900 W 737 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

• No lava rock • Flame failure & pilot • Piezo ignition • 100,000 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

• Cooking area 292 x 500mm • No lava rock • Hi-Lo control to burner • External Dimensions: 300 W 812 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

35


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

Char Grills & Grills G3925-FS

G598-LS

QTS-1

• Cooking area 860 x 630mm • No charcoal required • 3 manually controlled burners • External Dimensions: 900 W 770 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

• Cooking area 1192 x 500mm • No lava rock • Individual Hi-Lo control to each burner • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Adjustable top • Independent high powered elements • Plate detection feature • External Dimensions: 570 W 533 D 518 H • On Site Warranty

G3512

SLM90

OG7301

• Single high power gas burner • Twin heat settings • Brander size 450 x 410mm • External Dimensions: 725 W 585 D 505 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 shelves with 4 shelf positions • Aluminium branding plate included • Removable fat collection tray • External Dimensions: 785 W 350 D 400 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Ceramic burners • Branding plate & grill/toast rack • Piezo ignition wand • External Dimensions: 785 W 365 D 445 H • On Site Warranty

G91B

G3532

• Single high power gas burner • Twin heat settings • Brander size 540 x 275mm • External Dimensions: 785 W 330 D 350 H • On Site Warranty

UKCS9

One of our best sellers and seen in kitchens throughout the country, the G91B is a true kitchen essential. Finish menu items to perfection with powerful, independent, infra red burners. With a wall bracket included as standard, valuable preparation space can be saved too.

• Powerful infra red burners • Wall bracket & branding plate included • 30,000 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

36

• Left & right individual burner control • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 900 W 455 D 456 H

• 4 adjustable rack positions • Wall mounting bracket included • Dual high performance infrared burners • External Dimensions: 900 W 470 D 450 H • On Site Warranty


OG7302

G580-8

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Grills & Bratt Pans

MVS90

For kitchens producing high volumes of food - typically hospitals, universities or banqueting operations - a Bratt Pan is a must have! Able to perform many of the key kitchen functions in one unit - frying, braising, boiling, poaching and more. Various sizes are available, with both manual or fully automated tilt.

• High efficiency plaque burners • 3 position gas control • c/w adjustable brander & toast rack • External Dimensions: 900 W 367 D 470 H • On Site Warranty

• 80 litre capacity • 50-320°C thermostatic control • Easy clean • 68,600 BTU/h • On Site Warranty

E91B

ISB-36

• 2 x 3kW powerful infra red elements • Left & right heat control • Easy clean & service • External Dimensions: 900 W 455 D 456 H • On Site Warranty

• Infra red burner • Independent LH and RH controls • Adjustable gas valve • External Dimensions: 914 W 451 D 438 H • On Site Warranty

G580-8E

G580-12

E580-8

• 80 litre capacity • Electric power tilting mechanism • 50-320°C thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 120 litre capacity • Manual tilting mechanism • 50-320°C thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 1200 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 80 litre capacity • Manual tilting mechanism • 50-320°C thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Manual tilting mechanism • Automatic pilot ignition & flame failure • NG or LPG • External Dimensions: 900 W 812 D 915 H

Don’t forget your gas hose!

Call the Sales Team for options & prices...

Prime Cooking & Heavy Duty Equipment

• Ceramic burners • Branding plate & grill/toast rack • Piezo ignition wand • External Dimensions: 900 W 560 D 550 H • On Site Warranty

37


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Specialist Equipment 38

Buying Guide

The use of technology and state of the art manufacturing capabilities is bringing new and exciting products to the catering equipment market and revolutionising the way kitchens choose to operate. This equipment is highly energy efficient and with the inclusion of smart technology, extremely easy to use – with, in some cases intuitive, touch screen controls and often integral self-diagnostics. Also within the specialist arena we are seeing an increasing trend for new multifunctional equipment. These pieces can undertake a number of tasks all in one unit and operate from a small kitchen footprint. However, they can be a substantial investment, albeit worth it, but understanding the full extent of their capabilities and functionality is paramount. The RH Hall Development Kitchen, based at our HQ, showcases a wide range of this specialist equipment and can provide a full hands-on session to prior to purchase. We can quote for your requirements on a supply, installation, training and maintenance basis. Here is just an overview of some of the key specialist pieces we supply… FRIMA VarioCooking Center® This range of Multificiency units combine all the functions of a kettle, fryer, griddle, bratt pan, tilting pan and pressure cooker in one unit – all at once! Save up to 50% on the space needed in your kitchen and save up to 40% on energy usage and cook four times faster than conventional cooking. It includes an overnight cooking programme to make use of off-peak electricity too. Create a highly productive and flexible kitchen with intelligent cooking that works at the touch of a button - eliminate time-consuming routine chores such as constant checking, stirring and temperature adjustments. With units ranging from 30-5000 meals per serving there is a VarioCooking Center® to suit every size of operation. The Ovention Matchbox Oven This impinger oven operates from a small kitchen footprint but can multi-task in a big way: it can bake, broil, cook, grill and roast and has up to 1,000 pre-programmed cook settings. It includes Ovention’s Revolutionary Precise Impingement, enabling caterers to control time, temperature and independent blower speeds for every food item. Superior temperature control with FlexTemp means caterers can increase or lower temperature by 50 degrees or more from one item to the next. It incorporates Ovention’s closed cooking system which means the doors are only opened when food is entering or exiting the oven chamber and no hood is required. Electrolux Libero Libero Point is an innovative mobile front of house cooking unit with a technological airfiltering system that reduces odours. The range is versatile, compact mobile kitchen-like equipment designed to hold electric top appliances from the Libero Line range, allowing you to prepare and serve fresh, quick dishes anywhere and in record time! The configuration can include integrated refrigerated drawers to preserve fresh foods whilst keeping you closer to the cooking action. Hundreds of meals can be served efficiently with no compromise on food quality, especially good when serving gourmet buffets with a quick turnaround. Electrolux High Speed Grill (HSG) Panini A revolutionary toasted sandwich maker for serving up tasty and crisp sandwiches in record times! The HSG Panini (High Speed Grill) is an ultra-modern grill design that turns a simple sandwich into a veritable treat in only 30 seconds! Handling any combination of bread and fillings, the HSG cooks sandwiches to the right level of crispiness and perfectly inside, thanks to 3 different heat sources.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


VCC112

VARIOCOOKING CENTER

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Frima VarioCooking Center

• 30+ meal output • VarioBoost™ heating system • Core temperature probe • External Dimensions: 1200 W 777 D 1100 H • On Site Warranty

• 30+ meal output • Boiling, frying & deep frying, all in 1 unit • Twice as fast! • External Dimensions: 962 W 800 D 400 H • On Site Warranty

The VarioCooking Center is designed to offer boiling, frying and deep frying processes - all in one unit, up to 4 times faster and using 40% less power consumption than conventional appliances. Whether for an à la carte restaurant or high volume contract catering - preparing 30 individual portions or thousands of meals - the VarioCooking Center is the ideal solution for the individual requirements of any kitchen. Built in intelligent controls help to simplify daily work loads - producing and monitoring desired results at the touch of a button. To see the full range of benefits and the huge versatility that this product offers, contact our Sales Team for details of the next live demonstration!

ACCESSORIES

VCC211

Specialist Equipment

VCC112T

• 100-300 meal output • Boiling, frying & deep frying • Twice as fast! • External Dimensions: 1157 W 914 D 1100 H • On Site Warranty

VCC311

A huge range of accessories are available to suit every catering operation and help users get the most from this highly adaptable range. All accessories are robust and specially designed to withstand every day commercial use. Choose from: • Scrapers • Automatic raising lowering devices • Stands • Colanders • Bain Marie attachments • Roasting Racks • Scoops • Trolleys • Baskets: Deep frying/Boiling/Individual Portion

• 100-500 meal output • Boiling, frying & deep frying, all in 1 unit • Twice as fast! • External Dimensions: 1540 W 914 D 1100 H • On Site Warranty

39


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Electrolux Libero Front of House System LIBERO POINT

351064

• Designed for 2 Libero appliances • Mobile counter • Integrated fan ventilation system • External Dimensions: 1000 W 780 D 1204 H • On Site Warranty

Specialist Equipment

351068

40

Theatre cooking couldn’t be easier with the Libero Point front of house cooking system! Mobile cooking stations with integral fan ventilation provide a base module - designed to accept 2 or 3 plug in, countertop units from the Libero range. Refrigeration can also be included for a complete and compact front of house solution. A selection of the most popular base modules and countertop appliances are shown here - please contact the Sales Team for details of the full range or to arrange a quotation.

• Designed for 2 Libero appliances • Mobile counter • 2 x independent refrigerated drawers • External Dimensions: 1000 W 780 D 1204 H • On Site Warranty

603526

603528

603521

• Single induction wok cooking zone • Auto pan detection • Touch button controls • External Dimensions: 325 W 400 D 180 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 1.4kW induction cooking zones • Independent touch button controls • Fast heat-up time • External Dimensions: 325 W 600 D 130 H • On Site Warranty

• Touch button controls • 20-265°C temperature range • Cooking surface prevents flavour transfer • External Dimensions: 325 W 600 D 180 H • On Site Warranty

602127

602130

602131

• Ribbed top and bottom cast iron plates • Self balancing upper plate • 0-300°C thermostatically controlled temp • External Dimensions: 260 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and bottom cast iron plates • Self balancing upper plate • 0-300°C thermostatically controlled temp • External Dimensions: 380 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom cast iron plates • Self balancing upper plate • 0-300°C thermostatically controlled temp • External Dimensions: 380 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty


This revolutionary system uses Precision Impingement® technology to provide the speed of a rapid cook, without any loss of quality. Using internal catalytic filtration to limit any smoke, grease and any cooking odours or emissions, there is no need for extraction or ventilation. Capable of baking, grilling or roasting - all in one unit - a full and varied menu can be cooked quickly and easily, supported by intuitive cooking controls with menu upload capabilities. For full details on this innovative range, contact our Sales Team! M1313

• Revolutionary closed cooking system • No extraction required • Up to 1000 pre-programmed settings • FlexTemp™ ultimate temperature control • Intuitive one touch display • 2 auto loading cooking surfaces • Auto unload to prevent overcooking • Bake, grill or roast in 1 unit! • Contact us for more details • External Dimensions: 1267 W 728 D 513 H • On Site Warranty

M360-12

• Unique rotating cavity system • No extraction required • Up to 600 pre-programmed settings • USB menu upload capability • FlexTemp™ ultimate temperature control • Intuitive one touch display • 2 auto loading cooking surfaces • Auto unload to prevent overcooking • Bake, grill or roast in 1 unit! • External Dimensions: 744 W 947 D 505 H • On Site Warranty

HSG

Specialist Equipment

OVENTION

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ovention & HSG High Speed Grill

For iWave Automated Foodservice Solutions, see pages 12-13...

This unique product uses microwave technology, infrared radiation and traditional contact plates to produce high quality toasted sandwiches 75% quicker than a standard panini grill - hot sandwiches in less than 1 minute. The top grill plate automatically adjusts to the product being cooked and opens when cooking is complete. Perfect for anywhere wanting great results, fast! Contact our Sales Team for information on our complete service, including demonstrations and menu development in our test kitchen, plus full installation and training.

• Hot paninis in less than 30 seconds! • 4 preset programs • External Dimensions: 361 W 675 D 800 H

• Infra-red, contact plates & microwave heating • Electronic control with digital display • On Site Warranty

Soup on demand 24/7! From Crop to Cup... See pages 98-99

41


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

Simply Stainless Modular & Bespoke Fabrications

Kitchen design made simple

The off-the-shelf system that’s stronger than welded! Fully modular, easy to assemble & expandable with a huge range of accesories, the Simply Stainless range of Fabrications can create the perfect layout for any commercial kitchen. Everyday essential items such as Wall Benches, Centre Tables, Sinks, Racking & Wall Shelves are all available at market beating prices, with Next Day Delivery available across the range. The wide range of accessories - including Chef’s Drawers, Undershelves, Leg Braces, Door Panels & more - allow for bespoke designs with the speed of ‘off-the-shelf’, Special doesn’t have to mean ‘special order’!

42

The high quality of the range is shown using the ‘knock test’ and ‘stability test’ - backed up with a top quality no. 4 finish and 1.2mm tops. Once assembled, the Simply Stainless system is even stronger than welded! This confidence is backed up by a Lifetime Warranty on every product in the range - an industry first for Fabrications.


Full kitchen

£3,500.00

£4,745.00

Design your perfect kitchen By combining the versatility of the Simply Stainless range with the capabilities of our 15,000 sq. ft. factory, we can help you create your dream kitchen - quickly, easily and affordably! With the help of our Bespoke Solutions Manager, we can utilise the wide range of Simply Stainless accessories to provide off-the-shelf solutions, with bespoke modifications provided by our factory wherever required. CAD & BIM drawings are available for every product in the Simply Stainless range, allowing you to visualise, plan and adapt as needed.

Check out our unique Kitchen Designer Tool... visit www.simplystainless.com

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

Full kitchen

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Simply Stainless Modular & Bespoke Fabrications

Can’t find what you’re looking for? We can build it for you! Whether you need an non-standard size, a unique feature or something completely out-of-the-ordinary, we can help. For details visit: www.rhhallfabrications.com or speak to our Bespoke Solutions Manager Adam Hall on: 07725 087879 adam.hall@rhhall.com

ction Satisfanteed Guara

43


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

Buying Guide

By combining the specialist skills of our own Fabrications business with our exclusive distributorship of Simply Stainless ‘off the shelf’ fabrication systems we created a Bespoke Solutions Division, which enables us to offer our customers unparalleled expertise within tailored fabrications. The division provides a bespoke, design and planning service that brings even more creative, cost effective fabricated solutions to the market and, since its creation in 2011, has gone from strength to strength, with a full team of dedicated experienced professionals behind it and a manufacturing capability that’s based here in the UK, bespoke tailor made requirements can be designed and built or simply adapted from the Simply Stainless off the shelf offering to suit every commercial need, with minimum lead times. Bespoke Solutions Manager, Adam Hall, heads up the service and is a key link between the internal team, the factory and our customers. His understanding of the market, fabrications and project management skills have brought many solutions to reality. Also, behind the scenes is the in house CAD/CAM department that is available to design products directly from customers’ specifications - the ethos is ‘If you can sketch it, we can make it!’. Considerable investment has been made into the 15,000 square foot fabrications factory to modernise the manufacturing process, to now offer a complete metal work and product consultation service, working with all mild steel, stainless steel and aluminium from 0.7mm to 3.0mm thick. British Steel and British components are used wherever feasible, to ensure quality and consistency and structures that will last the test of time. Certified to ISO 9001 quality assurance and government stamped as an approved and certified supplier to any Public sector organisation and buying groups. The Simply Stainless ‘off the shelf’ range of modular fabrication is a fantastic solution where speed is of the essence, as the range is available from us on a next working day basis throughout the UK. This easy to assemble system can be extended at any time, creating a bespoke result. The range encompasses everyday essentials, such as Wall Benches, Sinks and Wall Shelves, all available in sizes from 600mm to 2400mm, including new 2100mm products. It also includes more specialised items such as dishwasher outlet/inlet tabling, events tables and food service trolleys. The range is completed with a large choice of add on accessories – chef’s drawers, leg braces, over and under shelves. All units are precision engineered, marked by the highest quality tig welding of joints and their professional finish. Fully welded sinks with gauge thickness uniformity and 3mm backing on bench tops delivers the strongest modular bench on the market. The products are all manufactured from high-grade stainless steel and amply pass the ‘knock-test’ and ‘stability test’ - two ways of really benchmarking the true quality of a modular benching/tabling system. Such is the confidence in the products that all the range comes with a no quibble lifetime warranty. The fabrication options available from the Bespoke Division are endless. Combine the highest standard of finish, competitive pricing and turnaround for large bespoke projects from built to delivery within 7 days – we have one of the best bespoke performances available on the market. No long waiting times for overseas deliveries. And you can visit our UK factory to discuss your requirements first hand with the team.

For more details, please visit www.rhhallfabrications.com or www.simplystainless.com, where you can also use the Kitchen Designer tool to create your very own perfect kitchen! You can also view videos on the benefits and easy assembly of the Simply Stainless range at www.youtube.com/user/rhhallcatering

Advantages • Modular systems offer versatility and mobility – ideal for ever changing kitchens. • A wide range of accessories offer huge versatility to suit any user. • Bespoke sizes of stainless steel tabling and shelving can be catered for via the RH Hall fabrications division, so tricky kitchen layouts aren’t a problem.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Look for a range that is easy to install and has optional extras so you can add on or change if required. Consider the bespoke route which may overcome tricky layouts or prove to be a more flexible and cost effective option. Choose designs that will minimise dirt traps. • Build quality and reliability – When choosing tabling and shelving, look for a top quality high grade stainless steel finish – check the depth of worktops – do they pass the ‘knock’ test? Check the availability and cost of spare parts and the after sales service, plus any warranty periods. The Simply Stainless range comes with a lifetime warranty. • Operational features – For modular systems, check how easy they are to assemble and their strength and stability once built. Look for fully welded sinks and tubular legs for strength and ease of cleaning.

44

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


SS01 Centre Table

ACCESSORIES

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Modular Benches

SS02 Wall Bench

• Top quality no. 4 finish • 1.2mm top • c/w undershelf • Available in sizes 300mm to 2400mm • Lifetime Warranty

SS02 (BS) Infill

• For Blue Seal Evolution range • Top quality no. 4 finish • Easy to assemble system • Available in sizes 300mm to 900mm • Lifetime Warranty

Turn your table into something much more with the wide range of accessories available within the Simply Stainless range. Create your own bespoke solution by adding to your existing Simply Stainless table at any time - all accessories can be easily retro fitted on site in minutes. Choose from extra leg braces, undershelves, cassettes for trays and baskets or sink bowl covers, plus many more comprehensive solutions that can be found throughout this section. Special couldn’t be simpler! For help creating your own bespoke solution, contact our Sales Team or our Bespoke Solutions Manager now... Adam Hall - 07725 087879 - adam.hall@rhhall.com • SSLB Leg Braces - Available in sizes 600 to 2400mm • SSUS Undershelves - Available to fit 600 to 2400mm tables • SS35GDC - 6 x 1/1 GN Cassette • SS36DBC - Dishwasher Basket Cassette • SS20SBC - Sink Bowl Cover to increase worktop space

Evolve your Prime Cooking equipment by adding prep space...

Ask the Sales Team about models designed for

SS03 Mobile Bench

• Mobile • 2 braked and 2 unbraked castors • Fully modular & expandable • Available in sizes 600mm to 1200mm • Lifetime Warranty

SS04 Corner Bench

SS19 Drawer

SS32 Door Panels

• For corner operation • Top quality no. 4 finish • c/w undershelf & upstand • 2 x 900mm benches • Lifetime Warranty

• Single, double, triple or 1/1 GN options • Full stainless steel construction • Fits all tabling • Easy to fit bolt on accessory • Lifetime Warranty

• Easy to fit bolt on accessory • Available in sizes 600mm to 2400mm • CAD/BIM drawings available on request • External Dimensions: 600 W • Lifetime Warranty

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

• Top quality no. 4 finish • 1.2mm top • c/w undershelf • Available in sizes 600mm to 2400mm • Lifetime Warranty

45


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

Sinks, Dishwash Tables, Wall Shelves, Overshelves & Cupboards SS05 Single Sink

SS06 Double Sink

SS24 Triple Sink

• Single centre bowl with drainer either side • Bowl size 450 x 450 x 300 • c/w undershelf & upstand • Available in sizes 600mm to 1200mm • Lifetime Warranty

• Double bowl with drainer either side • Bowl size 450 x 450 x 300 • Fully modular & expandable • Available in sizes 1200mm to 2400mm • Lifetime Warranty

• Triple bowl • 2400mm wide • Bowl size 450 x 450 x 300 • External Dimensions: 2400 W 600 D 900 H • Lifetime Warranty

SS10 Solid Shelf

SS11 Piped Shelf

SS29 Cupboard

• Solid shelf with upstand to rear, LH & RH • Top quality no. 4 finish • Available in sizes 600mm to 2400mm • Lifetime Warranty

• Piped shelf construction • Top quality no. 4 finish • Available in sizes 600mm to 2400mm • Lifetime Warranty

• Sliding stainless steel doors • Fully modular & expandable • Top quality no. 4 finish • Available in sizes 900mm &1200mm • Lifetime Warranty

SS07/08/09/37 Dishwash Tables

SS12/13 Overshelves

• Easy to fit bolt on accessory • Top quality no. 4 finish • Available in sizes 1200mm to 2100mm • Lifetime Warranty

Turn your Overshelf into a Heated Gantry...

Designed to fit all leading brands of commercial passthrough dishwashers, there is a Simply Stainless model for every kitchen layout. All models are available for either LH or RH operation and accessories such as cassettes, taps and pre rinses can be easily added. Built to the same ultra high standard as the rest of the range, available for next day delivery from stock, can be assembled in minutes and fully modular to fit the full Simply Stainless range. • SS07 - ‘Cleans’ Outlet Benches - 1200 or 1650mm • SS08 - ‘Dirties’ Inlet Benches with Sinks - 1200 or 1650mm • SS09 - ‘Dirties’ Inlet Benches with Double Sinks - 1650mm only • SS37 - Entry/Exit Bench to accept 1x Dishwasher Basket - 600mm

46

Contact Sales to discuss lamp options...


SS14/15/16 Trolleys

SS27 Oven Stands

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Trolleys, Shelving, Stands & Other Equipment

SS17 Racking

• Fully adjustable • Solid stainless steel shelves • Top quality no. 4 finish • Available in sizes 900mm to 1200mm • Lifetime Warranty

Carefully designed to work with some of the industry’s best selling products, these stands are built to the usual Simply Stainless high quality standard, backed up by a Lifetime Warranty. Easy to assemble and available for Next Day Delivery from stock, they are also highly affordable. For a quote, please contact our Sales Team! • SS27SCC101 - Designed to fit Rational SCC61 & SCC101 Combi Steamers - see page 19-20 • SS27E32 - Designed to fit the Blue Seal E32MAX/E32D4 Oven - See page 17

SS17DF Racking

SS28 M/W Shelf

SS38 Event Table

• Tilted defrost shelves • Easy to assemble system • Fully modular & expandable • Available in sizes 900mm to 1200mm wide • Lifetime Warranty

• Top quality no. 4 finish • Suitable for machines up to 65kg • CAD/BIM drawings available on request • External Dimensions: 600 W 580 D • Lifetime Warranty

• Portable, folding table. Ideal for events • Top quality no. 4 finish • 1.2mm top with stainless reinforcing channels • External Dimensions: 1800 W 700 D 900 H • Lifetime Warranty

SS23 Granite Bench

• Top quality no. 4 finish • Black granite work top • c/w undershelf • Available in sizes 900mm to 1200mm wide • Lifetime Warranty

Fabrication - Modular & Bespoke

• SS14 - 2 Tier Serving Trolley • SS15 - 3 Tier Serving Trolley • SS16 – 1/1 GN 18 Level Clearing Trolley • SS16-2/1 – 2/1 GN 18 Level Clearing Trolley • SS16BT – 18 Level Bakery Trolley • SS16BTI – 18 Level Imperial Bakery Trolley

SS18 Grill Bench

• Accepts Salamander Grill up to 900mm • Easy to assemble system • Fully modular & expandable • External Dimensions: 900 W 600 D 900 H • Lifetime Warranty

Did you know?

The SS180900BS is specifically designed for the G91B - see page 36...

47


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Buying Guide

It really can be a mine field to decide what to choose out of the hundreds of brands and variations of light duty equipment on the market. By medium duty we generally mean countertop items that mainly plug into a 13amp socket - but just because most of this kit is smaller, it still plays just as an important role as their bigger counterparts, so don’t underestimate or overlook these smaller key pieces, they can really take the pressure of prime cooking equipment and aid throughput, efficiency and help generate extra income, whether they are placed back or front of house. The choice really depends on your type of operation, the throughput and staffing levels and current/future menu requirements – there’s no point in having lots of individual pieces of kit if they are going to sit on a shelf for the majority of the time! Specific pieces of equipment, for example induction hobs or panini grills, can be chosen to accommodate particular food types or menu’s. Equipment that is multi-functional and versatile is ideal particularly where space is at a premium; equipment that multi-tasks and has a small footprint can help save valuable space and maximise returns. The key is to know exactly what the equipment is going to be used for to ensure maximum usage and cost effectiveness.

Advantages • Allow an operator to easily expand or adapt their offering for minimal outlay, adding versatility to cater for changing trends and demands. • Takes the strain off prime cooking equipment and increases efficiency. • Maximises limited kitchen space. • Equipment is portable so can be deployed at alternative suitable locations. Can create ‘theatre’ front of house. • Use less energy and quicker than larger counterparts used to do the same task, especially for smaller quantities or peaks in service. • Easy to use and install - equipment that can speed up preparation, cooking and service and be used by non-skilled staff.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Caterers should assess their real equipment needs in line with current and future menu requirements and throughput. Look at your type of operation – what food is served? What numbers and turnaround of customers are there? Peaks in service? Specific pieces of equipment can be chosen to accommodate particular food types and capacities determined by throughput. • Build quality and reliability – Choose reputable, commercial brands that are good quality, durable and reliable and check for relevant kite marks. Look for a full manufacturer’s warranty – the minimum being at least a year. Check the availability of spare parts and after care package. Don’t be tempted down the cheaper route – a lot of this equipment doesn’t have any product conformity standards - think of whole life costs! • Operational features – stylish design will enhance front of house use, but also look at heat-up and recovery times, simple controls for ease of use, such as independent heat setting controls for greater versatility, drip trays, temperature gauges and removable parts for ease of cleaning. For panini grills, look at plate options. Check out optional extras such as interchangeable tools or attachments to enhance multi-tasking and operational safety features to reduce the risk of injury.

48

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


LBR2

MC30L4B

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Hobs & Induction

CTBT01

Unbeknown to many, induction hobs actually cook faster than their gas counterparts and are very economical too. This type of cooking is becoming more popular, especially for front of house. Extremely simple and very safe, this countertop ‘plug & play’ model is built to withstand the demands of any busy catering operation.

• 2 x 1.5kW sealed plates • Variable controls • Pressed hob to collect spillages • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 275 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Adjustable temperature 60-240°C • Touchpad controls • External Dimensions: 326 W 386 D 101 H

HT3

P4H

HT6

• 2 x 1.5kW 180mm sealed hotplates • Six position switches control each hotplate • Auto heat reduction if pan boils dry/removed • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 ring hob • 200mm diameter radiant size • Indented top • External Dimensions: 600 W 700 D 340 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 1.5kW and 2 x 2kW hotplates • Six position switches control each hotplate • Auto heat reduction if pan boils dry/removed • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

HT6G

CTIN01

IH21

• 4 x 3.7kW burners • Vitreous enamelled cast iron pan supports • Fully pressed & sealed hob for easy cleaning • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 305 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 cooking zones • Instant heat • Easy to operate • External Dimensions: 320 W 600 D 275 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Twin cooking zones for high output • Boost function • 6mm Schott Ceran® ceramic surface • External Dimensions: 350 W 654 D 115 H • On Site Warranty

• Auto pan detection cut-out • 2.8kW • Workshop Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• 2 x 1.5kW sealed hotplates • Variable heat control • Automatic heat reduction when pans removed • External Dimensions: 565 W 400 D 119 H • On Site Warranty

49


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Fryers LSF

MSF5

CTFR01

• Stainless steel lift out tank • Batter plate & lid included • 8kg raw to cooked chips per hour • External Dimensions: 185 W 400 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Batter plate & lid included • 3 litre oil capacity • External Dimensions: 180 W 420 D 360 H • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

• Thermostat 30-190°C • Drain pipe included • 6 litre capacity • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 275 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

LDF

MSF8T

DF33

• Stainless steel lift out tank • Batter plate & lid included • 11kg raw to cooked chips per hour • External Dimensions: 270 W 400 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Batter plate & lid included • 6 litre oil capacity • External Dimensions: 270 W 420 D 360 H • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 8kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

MSF8

PSF3

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Batter plate & drain tap included • 14kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 715 D 455 H • On Site Warranty

DF36

The comprehensive range of Maestrowave fryers offers a model to suit every foodservice need. Manufactured from high quality stainless steel and featuring heavy duty baskets, plus a batter plate and lid. Every fryer in the range includes a thermostatic control to ensure consistent results and a safety cut out to prevent overheating and prolong the life of the fryer.

• Thermostatic control • 6 litre oil capacity • Basket 220 x 240 x 100mm • External Dimensions: 270 W 420 D 360 H

50

• Batter plate & lid included • Lift off fryer head • 3kW • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 18kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 335 H • On Site Warranty


PSF9

MDF88

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Fryers

MDF55

Yielding consistently high performances, the Maestrowave range of fryers is reliable and efficient - a must for any operator requiring quick service. Ease of cleaning and maintenance is also a key consideration and these models are designed to prevent any dirt or grease traps. Removable fryer heads and tanks offer further ease of use - whilst safety cut outs ensure the unit has been reassembled correctly after cleaning.

• Thermostatic control • Batter plate & lid included • 2 x 3 litre oil capacity • External Dimensions: 360 W 420 D 360 H • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

• Thermostatic control • 2 x 6 litre oil capacity • Basket 220 x 240 x 100mm (x2) • External Dimensions: 530 W 420 D 360 H

LDF2

2001

MDF88T

• 2 x stainless steel lift out tanks • Batter plates & lids included • 21kg raw to cooked chips per hour • External Dimensions: 540 W 400 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x stainless steel lift out tanks • Stainless steel fryer head • Up to 28kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 540 D 310 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Batter plate & lid included • 2 x 6 litre oil capacity • External Dimensions: 530 W 420 D 360 H • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

DF66

PDF3

DF612

• Thermostatic control • Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 16kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Batter plate & drain tap included • 2 x 14kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 715 D 455 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 36kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

• Batter plate & lid included • Lift off fryer head • 2 x 3kW • Fryer Head Exchange Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Batter plate & drain tap included • 42kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 715 D 455 H • On Site Warranty

51


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Fryers PDF6

AGFP

J6

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Batter plate & drain tap included • 2 x 28kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 715 D 455 H • On Site Warranty

• Piezo ignition • No fuel required • Single tank twin basket • External Dimensions: 440 W 522 D 480 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 18kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 970 H • On Site Warranty

PSPF6

J5

PDPF6

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Bucket & strainer included • 28kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 715 D 1095 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Piezo Ignition • 18kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 1065 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat 50-200°C • Bucket & strainer included • 2 x 28kg frozen fries per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 715 D 1095 H • On Site Warranty

J12

J10

• Thermostatic control • Piezo Ignition • 36kg frozen chips per hour • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 1065 H • On Site Warranty

PDGF

Part of the extensive Silverlink 600 range, the J12 offers a medium duty, freestanding option, fitting in perfectly with the other modular products available. 600mm deep, to make the most of available kitchen space and create your very own perfect layout. Single tank and gas versions are also available.

• Thermostatic control • 36kg frozen chips per hour • Front controls • 2 x 6kW • On Site Warranty

52

• Drain tap, batter plate & lid • 2 x 9 litre • Basket 200 x 310 x 100mm (x2 inc) • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 970 H

• V’ style mild steel tanks • Thermostat controls • 2 x 12 litre • External Dimensions: 600 W 690 D 940 H • On Site Warranty


LCS

PB66

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Chip Scuttles & Pasta Boilers

CCS

Perfect for any restaurant offering Italian food, the PB66 offers pasta perfection as part of the Silverlink 600 Modular Countertop range from Lincat. Various basket options are available to order with this model to suit the needs of each individual user.

• Keeps fries ready to serve for up to 20 mins • 2kg capacity • Supplied with serving scoop • External Dimensions: 305 W 360 D 420 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 7 litre capacity • 10kg pasta per hour • Drain taps & lids • Hinged element • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 335 H

GMFFL

CS4

PCD

• Metal sheathed element heats food from above • 2 light bulbs • Display sign holder • External Dimensions: 329 W 642 D 427 H • On Site Warranty

• Recommended max storage time 20 mins • 3.5kg capacity • Heated from below • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 265 H • On Site Warranty

• Doubles up as dry bains marie • Independently variable controlled quartz lamp • Heat source from the base of the unit • External Dimensions: 450 W 700 D 770 H • On Site Warranty

CS4G

LPB

PB33

• Heated from above & below • Overhead heat lamp • Removable 1/1 GN container • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 645 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 litre capacity • Adjustable heat control • Max batch size 500g fresh pasta (uncooked) • External Dimensions: 270 W 400 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 litre capacity • Various basket options (not included) • 5kg pasta per hour • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

• Various basket options (not included) • Thermostatic controls • Front controls • 2 x 3kW • On Site Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Keeps chips at serving temp for 20 mins • 2.5kg approx capacity • Adjustable temperature control • External Dimensions: 285 W 400 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

53


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Griddles LGR

CGR

MEMT17022

• Cast iron cooking surface • Large fat collection drawer • Cooking area 290 x 310mm • External Dimensions: 315 W 400 D 162 H • On Site Warranty

• Polished plate for good heat retention • Thermostatic control • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 280 W 365 D 250 H • On Site Warranty

• Smooth glass ceramic cooking plate • Adjustable Temperature 0-400°C • Infrared elements • External Dimensions: 360 W 340 D 150 H • Workshop Warranty

CTGD01

LGR2

CGR2

• Smooth griddle plate • Single heat zone • Variable control • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 300 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Double cast iron cooking surface • Thermostatic control • Large fat collection drawer • External Dimensions: 615 W 400 D 162 H • On Site Warranty

• Polished plate for good heat retention • Thermostatic control • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 560 W 365 D 250 H • On Site Warranty

MEMT17080

GS3

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Thermostatic control • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 330 H • On Site Warranty

GS4

The Maestrowave MEMT17080 Ceramic Griddle is a fantastic for any entry level user looking for fast heat up times and easy cleaning. All from a 13 amp plug for easy operation. Available for Next Day Delivery throughout the UK!

• Smooth glass ceramic cooking plate • Infrared elements • 3kW • Workshop Warranty

54

• Adjustable temperature 0-400°C • Easy clean • External Dimensions: 520 W 580 D 160 H

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Thermostatic control • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 330 H • On Site Warranty


1923

GS6

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Griddles & Char Grills

GS4G

This industry favourite is part of the Silverlink countertop range, offering light to medium duty equipment for a variety of applications. All Silverlink griddles have a solid 12mm thick machined steel top to ensure even heat distribution and excellent heat retention. Fully welded plates also eliminate any dirt traps, meaning easy cleaning and excellent hygiene.

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Flame failure • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 415 H • On Site Warranty

• Fully welded machined steel plate • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 330 H

PG6

PGG6

PGF1000

• Polished plate to ensure good heat retention • Element covers full surface • Thermostat 50-300°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 700 D 355 H • On Site Warranty

• Polished plate to ensure good heat retention • Element covers full surface • Thermostat • External Dimensions: 600 W 700 D 355 H • On Site Warranty

• 6mm steel plate • Cooking area 983 x 395mm • 3 x stainless steel burners • External Dimensions: 1020 W 510 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

CG4

CG6

PGC6

• Heat transfer radiants • No lava rock • Twin heat zones • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 415 H • On Site Warranty

• Heat transfer radiants • No lava rock • Twin heat zones • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 415 H • On Site Warranty

• Unique solid stainless grid • Prevents food sticking • Shielded twin burners • External Dimensions: 600 W 795 D 340 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostatic control • Approx 120 burgers per hour from frozen • On Site Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Polished plate for good heat retention • Thermostatic control • Removable fat drawer • External Dimensions: 450 W 520 D 240 H • On Site Warranty

55


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Grills LPC

CPG

CAS

• Independent elements • Variable bottom element • Infra red elements • External Dimensions: 551 W 302 D 328 H • On Site Warranty

• Independent top & bottom control • Infra red elements • Toast rack included • External Dimensions: 520 W 420 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• Independent element control - variable top • Infra red elements • Toast rack & grill pan • External Dimensions: 520 W 420 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

LSC

CAS2

MEMT12900

• Independent elements • Variable heat control • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 551 W 302 D 328 H • On Site Warranty

• Independent element control • Variable top & bottom • Infra red elements • External Dimensions: 520 W 420 D 315 H • On Site Warranty

• Independent top & bottom radiant elements • Accelerated heat up • Ideal for toast, sandwiches etc • External Dimensions: 590 W 290 D 290 H • Workshop Warranty

CTGL01

GR3

• Radiant element • Crumb tray and toasting rack • Opt wall brackets, branding plates, shelves • External Dimensions: 600 W 350 D 310 H • On Site Warranty

1872

Where space is at a premium, the CTGL01 offers a perfect solution as it includes a wall mounting bracket as standard - freeing up that all valuable prep space. Perfect for finishing and browning a wide range of dishes - plus toasting and grilling.

• Even heat distribution • Wall bracket included • Removable panels for easy cleaning • External Dimensions: 610 W 330 D 294 H

56

• Self supporting cooking grid • Slide out fat collection tray • 2.8kW • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Solid heating element • Grill pan and toasting rack • Optional wall brackets and branding plate • External Dimensions: 605 W 490 D 340 H • On Site Warranty


GR3G

MEMT16000X

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Grills & Panini Grills

7073

The Maestrowave range of Panini and Contact Grills is the largest and most comprehensive selection available in Europe. Perfect for the huge ‘Food to Go’ market, a Contact Grill is essential in any grab and go catering environment. All models in the range operate from 1 or 2x13 amp plugs, meaning you can un-box and start cooking! Standard cast iron plates are perfect for paninis and other bread items.

• 3 rack positions, toast rack and tray • Auto flame failure device • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 795 W 550 D 485 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and bottom cast iron plates • 295 x 250mm grill area • Ideal for panini/bread items • External Dimensions: 310 W 380 D 460 H

CTAS01

AS3

MEMT16000XNS

• Smooth action, adjustable top cooking element • 1/1 GN compatible • Slide out fat collection tray • External Dimensions: 470 W 480 D 530 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Radiant element • Toasting rack • Smooth action easy-lift adjustable grill hood • External Dimensions: 600 W 550 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and bottom non-stick plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 295 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 310 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

LPG

MEMT16002XNS

MEMT16001XNS

• Ribbed top & bottom • Enamelled cast iron plates • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 293 W 400 D 165 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat top and bottom non-stick plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 295 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 310 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom non-stick plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 295 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 310 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Thermostat 0-300°C • Counterbalanced top • 1.8kW • Workshop Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Ceramic burners • Crumb tray and toasting rack • Optional wall bracket, branding plate & shelf • External Dimensions: 600 W 350 D 405 H • On Site Warranty

57


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Panini/Contact Grills ELIO RR T

GSA610R

MEMT17010

• Ribbed top & bottom • Cast iron plates • Ceramic coating treatment • External Dimensions: 260 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom plates • 375 x 275mm bottom plate area • Die-cast aluminium plates • External Dimensions: 435 W 490 D 220 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat top & bottom ceramic cooking plates • Infrared elements • Thermostat 0-320°C • External Dimensions: 410 W 480 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

PPGL

MEMT16030X

MEMT17011

• Ribbed top and bottom • Thermostatically controlled • 340x240mm grill area • External Dimensions: 440 W 430 D 240 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and bottom cast iron plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 430 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 450 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top & flat bottom • Ceramic cooking plates • Infrared elements • External Dimensions: 410 W 480 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

MEMT16031XNS

MEMT17012

• Ribbed top & bottom ceramic cooking plates • Infrared elements • Thermostat 0-320°C • External Dimensions: 410 W 480 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

96001

For users wanting to keep to a single 13 amp power supply but still requiring increased production from their panini grill, the MEMT16031XNS offers a large single cooking area of 430 x 250mm. As always, various plate options are available and both standard cast iron and impregnated non-stick offerings will suit the menu of each individual. • Ribbed top and flat bottom non-stick plates • 430 x 250mm grill area (ribbed version shown) • Ideal for delicate foods • External Dimensions: 450 W 380 D 460 H

58

• Thermostat 0-300°C • Counterbalanced top • 2.8kW • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom plates • Adjustable sprung top plate • 50-300°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 506 W 410 D 210 H • Workshop Warranty


CORT LL T

MEMT16052XNS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Panini/Contact Grills

CORT LR T

The MEMT16052XNS shows the true versatility of the Maestrowave range of panini grills - double plates offer a huge total cooking area of 610 x 250mm and ribbed top/flat bottom plates allow true flexibility in the items that can be cooked. Add to this the impregnated non-stick plates, which are perfect for more delicate foods - but still heavy duty enough to cope with every day items such as toasties or paninis.

• Ribbed top & flat bottom • Cast iron plates • Ceramic coating treatment • External Dimensions: 380 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom non-stick plates • 610 x 250mm grill area (ribbed version shown) • Ideal for delicate foods • External Dimensions: 630 W 380 D 460 H

GSA815R

96002

LPG2

• Ribbed top and flat bottom plates • 500 x 275mm bottom plate area • Die-cast aluminium plates • External Dimensions: 560 W 490 D 220 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and flat bottom plates • Adjustable sprung top plates • 50-300°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 640 W 430 D 210 H • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top & bottom • Enamelled cast iron plates • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 623 W 400 D 165 H • On Site Warranty

LRG2

MEMT16050X

MEMT16053X

• Ribbed top & flat bottom • Enamelled cast iron plates • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 623 W 400 D 165 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top and bottom cast iron plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 610 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 630 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Flat top and bottom cast iron plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 610 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 630 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Thermostat 0-300°C • Counterbalanced top • 2 x 1.8kW • Workshop Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Flat top & bottom • Cast iron plates • Ceramic coating treatment • External Dimensions: 380 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

59


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Panini/Contact Grills MEMT16051XNS

PD RR-RR T

PD LR-LR T

• Half ribbed, half flat non-stick plates • Thermostat 0-300°C • 610 x 250mm grill area • External Dimensions: 630 W 380 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top & bottom • Cast iron plates • Ceramic coating treatment • External Dimensions: 515 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

• Ribbed top & flat bottom • Cast iron plates • Ceramic coating treatment • External Dimensions: 515 W 435 D 235 H • On Site Warranty

MEMT17061

MEMT17062

DD2W

• Ribbed top & flat bottom • Ceramic cooking plates • Infrared elements • External Dimensions: 640 W 480 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

• Ribbed top & bottom ceramic cooking plates • Infrared elements • Thermostat 0-320°C • External Dimensions: 640 W 480 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

• Output of 100 waffles per hour • 1 or 2 waffle capacity • Hotplates can be used individually • External Dimensions: 400 W 220 D 160 H • Workshop Warranty

MEMT17060

DST

• 2 contact plates • Output of 80 rounds per hour • Contact toaster • External Dimensions: 400 W 220 D 190 H • Workshop Warranty

Need Panini’s Pronto?!

Ceramic grills enhance the best selling Maestrowave range even further! Exceptionally fast heat up times, with natural non stick characteristics and easy cleaning, make these units a winning catering combination. Able to cook burgers, chicken, fish or steaks in minutes. • Flat top & bottom ceramic cooking plates • Thermostat 0-320°C • External Dimensions: 640 W 480 D 520 H

60

• Infrared elements • 580 x 280mm grill area • Workshop Warranty

Find the HSG High Speed Grill on page 10...


DB2S

DB4SP

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Toasters

DB3SP

From their first toaster in 1945, Dualit have been producing innovative products for over 70 years. The Classic range of toasters combines iconic design with heavy duty construction and unique ProHeat® elements which can be replaced any time. Available in a wide range of colours, slot sizes and menu options - from bread, to buns, to toasted sandwiches.

• 3 bread slots • Output of 98 slices per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 310 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 bread slots • Timer • Polished ends • ProHeat elements with 2 year warranty • External Dimensions: 360 W 210 D 220 H

TSSL14

DB4S

DCP4

• 4 bread slots • 2 or 4 slot selector • Variable timer control • External Dimensions: 360 W 260 D 230 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 4 bread slots • Output of 130 slices per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 360 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 bread slots • Output of 120 slices per hour • Auto pop-up • External Dimensions: 350 W 340 D 235 H • Workshop Warranty

LT6X

TSSL16

DB6S

• 6 bread slots • Unique scissor lift mechanism to avoid jams • Extra deep slots • External Dimensions: 450 W 220 D 240 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 bread slots • 3 or 6 slot selector • Variable timer control • External Dimensions: 460 W 260 D 230 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 6 bread slots • Output of 195 slices per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 460 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• Output of 130 slices per hour • Chrome body • 28mm slot width • 2.2kW • Workshop Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• 2 bread slots • Output of 65 slices per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 260 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

61


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Header XXX Duty Equipment

Toasters & Conveyor Toasters DS2SP

DS4S

DBUN/4SP

• 2 sandwich slots • Output of 40 rounds per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 310 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 sandwich slots • Output of 80 rounds per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 460 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 bun slots (toasts 1 side only) • Output of 70 buns per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 360 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

DBUN/6SP

DS/B3SP

DS/B4S

• 6 bun slots (toasts 1 side only) • Output of 105 buns per hour • Timer • External Dimensions: 460 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2 bread slots and 1 sandwich slot • 65 slices/20 sandwiches per hour • Chrome body • External Dimensions: 310 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2 bread slots and 2 sandwich slots • 65 slices/40 sandwiches per hour • Chrome body - White ends • External Dimensions: 360 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

DS/B4SP

MEMT18031

• 2 bread slots and 2 sandwich slots • 65 slices/40 sandwiches per hour • Chrome body - Polished ends • External Dimensions: 360 W 210 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

MEMT18011

This very popular range consists of various options to suit all possible requirements. The MEMT18031 has an ample output of 450 slices per hour and is capable of handling standard toast or buns, with a large clearance. Efficient, reliable and built to withstand the rigours of daily continual service. • Output of up to 450 slices per hour • Front output • Bun/Toast selector • External Dimensions: 470 W 410 D 390 H

### 62

• 55mm clearance • Speed control • Cool to touch stainless steel structure • Workshop Warranty

• Output of up to 100 slices per hour • 45mm clearance • Front or rear output • External Dimensions: 220 W 510 D 370 H • Workshop Warranty


TM-5H

DCT2

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Conveyor Toasters

CBT

This 2 slice energy saving conveyor toaster produces up to 360 slices an hour and uses unique thermostatically controlled elements to maintain the toasting temperature by cycling on and off when the toaster is idle. This feature saves up to 20% on energy consumption so is ideal in situations where toasting may not be continuous but you don’t want to power down the toaster to ‘stand by’ mode.

• Output of approx 400 slices/hr • Front or rear output • Single/double sided toasting • External Dimensions: 365 W 575 D 390 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Output of 360 slices per hour • Radiant quartz red heat elements • External Dimensions: 370 W 640 D 400 H

CT1

MEMT18021

TQ-405

• Up to 340 slices toast per hour • Adjustable speed • Adjustable upper & lower elements • External Dimensions: 410 W 668 D 398 H • On Site Warranty

• Output of up to 300 slices per hour • 55mm clearance • Front output • External Dimensions: 350 W 410 D 390 H • Workshop Warranty

• Output of up to 360 slices per hour • Front or rear output • Electronic controls to regulate heat • External Dimensions: 368 W 451 D 378 H • On Site Warranty

MEMT18061

DCT3

RT1500

• Output of up to 475 slices per hour • 55mm clearance • Front output • External Dimensions: 460 W 410 D 360 H • Workshop Warranty

• Output of 500 slices per hour • Radiant quartz red heat elements • Variable speed • External Dimensions: 470 W 640 D 400 H • On Site Warranty

• Output of up to 1200 slices per hour • Bun mode • 2 x 3.5kW independently controlled elements • External Dimensions: 580 W 620 D 480 H • Parts Only

• Variable browning control • Element selector for toast or buns/bagels • On Site Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Header XXX Duty Equipment

• Output of up to 180 slices per hour • Front or rear output • Electronic controls to regulate heat • External Dimensions: 289 W 416 D 387 H • On Site Warranty

### 63


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Bain Maries LBM

MBM1R

CBM2

• 2 pots • 1/4 GN 100mm deep containers • 2.75 ltr capacity per pot • External Dimensions: 285 W 400 D 196 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 x traditional round pot • 4.5 litre capacity • Dry Heat • External Dimensions: 270 W 330 D 230 H • Exchange Warranty

• 2 pots • 4.5 ltr capacity per pot • Wet or dry heat • External Dimensions: 500 W 370 D 255 H • On Site Warranty

LBM2

MBM2R

CTBM2

• 4 pots • 1/4 GN 100mm deep containers • 2.75 ltr capacity per pot • External Dimensions: 565 W 400 D 196 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x traditional round pots • 4.5 litre capacity per pot • Dry Heat • External Dimensions: 530 W 330 D 230 H • Exchange Warranty

• 2 x 4.2 litre round pots with lids • 1kW element • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 360 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

MBM2

CTBM01

• 3 x 1/3 GN containers and lids • Dry heat • Variable control • External Dimensions: 400 W 600 D 275 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

VBM-1

The MBM2 is a compact unit, offering 2 x 1/4 gastronorm containers. Indispensable in any kitchen, this unit provides a perfect starting point for smaller establishments. Dry heat makes the MBM2 perfect for sauces, soups or any other liquids. • 2 x 1/4 GN Containers 150mm deep • Simmerstat controls • External Dimensions: 270 W 330 D 230 H

64

• Dry Heat • Ideal for sauces, soups and other liquids • Exchange Warranty

• 3 x 65mm 1/3 GN containers • Supplied with lids • Dry heat • External Dimensions: 470 W 575 D 145 H • Parts Only


MBM3WT

MBM3W

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Bain Maries

1885

Bain Maries provide convenient and hygienic storage for a wide range of pre-cooked foods and liquids. The MBM3W includes 3 x 1/3 GN containers, each with a depth of 150mm. Wet heat means that this model is perfect for keeping dryer foods, such as meat or potatoes, at serving temperatures for several hours, without the worry of them drying out.

• 3 pots • Containers not included • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 545 W 350 D 300 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 x 1/3 GN Containers 150mm deep • Wet Heat • External Dimensions: 330 W 540 D 270 H

BS3W

KBAINS

KBAINL

• 2 pots • 4.5 litre capacity per pot • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 300 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 1/6 GN pots • 1.4 litre capacity per pot • c/w 1/6 GN containers with lids • External Dimensions: 400 W 360 D 200 H • Parts Only

• 4 x 1/4 GN pots • 2.2 litre capacity per pot • c/w 1/4 GN containers with lids • External Dimensions: 600 W 330 D 200 H • Parts Only

VBMG-2

MBM4

BMF1/1G

• 1 x 1/1 GN & 3 x 1/3 GN 65mm containers • Supplied with lids • Dry heat • External Dimensions: 795 W 575 D 620 H • Parts Only

• 4 x 1/4 GN Containers 150mm deep • Dry Heat • Simmerstat controls • External Dimensions: 530 W 330 D 230 H • Exchange Warranty

• 4 x 1/4 GN pots supplied • Wet well • Piezo ignition • External Dimensions: 560 W 350 D 310 H • On Site Warranty

• Silicone element • Ideal for dry foods such as potatoes or meat • Exchange Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• 3 x 1/3 GN Containers 150mm deep • Silicone element • Wet Heat • External Dimensions: 330 W 540 D 270 H • Exchange Warranty

65


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Bain Maries & Cold Servers BS4

BS4W

PWB4

• 4 pots • 4.5 litre capacity per pot • Dry heat • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 pots • 4.5 litre capacity per pot • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 450 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 pots • 4.5 litre capacity per pot • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 450 W 715 D 360 H • On Site Warranty

BM6BW

KCOLDS

KCOLDL

• 4 pots • 2 x 1/2 GN 2 x 1/4 GN 150mm deep containers • 2 x 8.7ltr and 2 x 3.8ltr capacity pots • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 290 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 x re-freezable eutectic plate • 4 x 1.1 litre capacity containers • Totally portable • External Dimensions: 400 W 330 D 130 H • Parts Only

• 2 x re-freezable eutectic plates • 6 x 1.1 litre capacity containers • Totally portable • External Dimensions: 600 W 330 D 130 H • Parts Only

CTBM4

VCSG-1

• 2 x re-freezable eutectic plates • Keeps food cold for up to 10 hours • 3 x 65mm deep 1/3 GN pans with lids • External Dimensions: 470 W 575 D 620 H • Parts Only

VCS-2

This wet heat bain marie includes 4 round pots, each with a large capacity of 4.2 litres. Ideal for soups and sauces, a drain tap is also included for ease of emptying and cleaning. A smaller 2 pot version is also available where space is tight. • 4 x 4.2 litre round pots with lids • Wet heat • External Dimensions: 500 W 600 D 360 H

66

• 1kW element • Drain tap • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 4 x re-freezable eutectic plates • Keeps food cold for up to 10 hours • 1 x 1/1 GN & 3 x 1/3 GN 65mm pans • External Dimensions: 795 W 575 D 145 H • Parts Only


SVT-CHEF

SVT-14LWB

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Water Baths, Hot Dog & Popcorn Equipment

SV25 Heavily featured in today’s market following use by many of the country’s top chefs, sous vide uses specific techniques to get food to the right temperature for the right length of time. Vacuum sealing means food becomes tender without losing their colour, nutrients or texture. We have a wide range of options available - including vacuum packing equipment. Contact our Sales Team for more details.

• 25 litre capacity • Digital display • 5 timers inc hours, minutes and seconds • External Dimensions: 375 W 465 D 415 H • On Site Warranty

• 14 litre capacity • Precise temperature control to 0.1°C • 99 minute timer with audible alarm • 30 minute heat up time (65°C) • Dry running protection • Quiet operation • External Dimensions: 350 W 355 D 315 H

• 35-99°C working temperature range • Digital LED display • 5 pre-programme options • Splash proof keypad • Energy efficient engineering • Easy to use push button controls • Workshop Warranty

SVT-28LWB

PA16101

HD400

• 28 litre capacity • 35-99°C working temperature range • Precise temperature control to 0.1°C • External Dimensions: 555 W 355 D 315 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1/2 GN 150mm deep container • 40 to 95°C temperature range • Steaming rack included • External Dimensions: 345 W 325 D 265 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 spikes and bun steamer • 7.5 litre glass container • Holds approximately 40 hot dogs • External Dimensions: 400 W 330 D 400 H • Parts Only

DOGHUT

4OZPOPTOP

8OZPOPTOP

• Fully branded hot dog steamer • Holds up to 100 hot dogs and 20 buns • Sliding doors • External Dimensions: 395 W 430 D 495 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4oz capacity • Warming deck • Can pop up to 10 cycles continuously • External Dimensions: 390 W 320 D 520 H • Workshop Warranty

• 8oz capacity • Warming deck • Can pop corn continually • External Dimensions: 630 W 460 D 385 H • Workshop Warranty

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

• Gastronorm to Water Bath in seconds! • Up to 40 litre recommended capacity • 20-100°C working temperature range • External Dimensions: 95 W 175 D 355 H • Workshop Warranty

67


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Back Bar & Medium Duty Equipment

Rice Cookers & Soup Kettles MC6

MRFW20L

SC

• 6 litre capacity • Removable non-stick inner bowl • 30 rice portions • External Dimensions: 370 W 440 D 335 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 20 litre capacity • Holds approx 20 litres of cooked rice/food • Teflon coated inner bowl • External Dimensions: 460 dia. 370 H • Workshop Warranty

• 5.1 litre capacity • Dry heat only • Controllable heat setting • External Dimensions: 250 dia. 350 H • Parts Only

DSK6SS

DSKEBK

RHW-1

• 6 litre capacity • Wet operation only • Hinged and removable stainless steel lid • External Dimensions: 255 dia. 360 H • Workshop Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • Wet operation only • Black finish • External Dimensions: 340 dia. 340 H • Workshop Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • 3 temperature settings from 50-100°C • For warming, steaming & boiling • External Dimensions: 360 W 330 D 335 H • On Site Warranty

MRC5L

DSKB

• 11 litre capacity • Wet or dry operation • Rustic brown finish • External Dimensions: 340 dia. 380 H • Workshop Warranty

Soup on demand - 24/7!

Maestrowave were one of the very first companies to enter the UK market with a truly commercial rice cooker and since then have continued to increase specification and performance levels. Today, the MRC5L has modern electronic controls and a clever auto shut off facility when the rice is cooked, continuing to keep things warm for up to 8 hours. A teflon ‘non stick’ removable bowl keeps things easy to clean down at the end of the day. • 5 litre capacity • Teflon coated inner bowl • Water collector • External Dimensions: 460 dia. 340 H

68

• Cooks & keeps rice warm for up to 8 hours • Electronic control • 1.95kW • Workshop Warranty

See pages 98-99...


Despite the unpredictability of the British weather, the popularity of eating and drinking outside continues apace, whether it is a table outside the local coffee shop or a pub garden with an alfresco dining terrace, there is no doubt that (even as a bi-product of the smoking ban) people like the opportunity to eat, drink and relax outside, and an establishment can considerably grow their turnover and reap the rewards, however, having the right equipment and creating the right space for your customers to enjoy is essential. With the use of canopies, glass screens and heaters, areas can now be used all year round, creating a valuable extension to inside space. Undoubtedly offering food outside is a great revenue generator and by being creative with menus and adding a bit of theatre using a commercial BBQ, customers will spend time and their money enjoying the experience. There is a professional range of BBQ grills to suit every user – from those with the smallest outdoor space, to the busy event caterer looking for the ultimate outdoor cooking station. Even outdoor catering hygiene issues are solved with completely selfcontained portable hand wash stations. We can also assist with full menu development and BBQ product training with Britain’s champion BBQ’er and Crown Verity ambassador, Ben Bartlett, as part of our complete outdoor solutions package.

Outdoor Catering

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Buying Guide

Advantages • Outdoor cooking is a great opportunity to increase covers and profitability and take some pressure off the main kitchen operation. The benefits of ‘fresh off the grill’, barbecued foods and quick service/great value for money are a great selling point for customers. • Profit and payback on commercial BBQ’s can be realised from day one! • Today’s professional BBQ equipment allows for more creative and adventurous dishes to be cooked, which appeals to a wide and diverse audience, regardless of age, culture and background and this also extends the throughput and occasions it can be used. • Commercial gas barbecues, such as the Crown Verity range, that have controllability and high power give chefs the ultimate in precision cooking, outdoors. Anything from fish, to pizzas and desserts can be cooked on a BBQ with ‘add on’ accessories – even wok cooking. Versatility beyond burgers!

Buying Tips By choosing the right model and maintaining it, you can expect it to last around 5-10 years. Crown Verity burners have a 10 year guarantee! • Which equipment? – Consider the potential throughput based upon the space/covers you have outside, the types of dishes/menu to be cooked on the BBQ and the skill level to do so; look at variations and peaks in service times. Consider the space carefully and plan accordingly. • Build quality and reliability - For BBQ’s look for a genuine commercial model, a domestic typical shed BBQ will not be able to recover quickly enough during a busy service and also will not last. Look for a BBQ that uses commercial grade stainless steel (be wary that many domestic models use stainless steel but are of light duty construction). Ensure the product comes with a full commercial warranty. Some have a lifetime guarantee! • Operational features - For BBQ’s, rapid heat-up so high temperatures for cooking can be reached in a matter of minutes. Check out the grid racks - stainless steel work much better than coated ones that invariably chip and flake off in time. Look for good portability for storage when not in use. Look for a model that provides useful add on accessories such as a rotisserie, smoker box, removable griddle plates, veggie/fish tray and removable ash tray if using charcoal or fat collection system.

Take a look at the new Crown Verity web site where you can build your own BBQ configuration online www.crownverity.com or visit www.rhhall.com. Every possible configuration is available.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty

69


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Outdoor Catering

Barbecues CAVALIER

MCB30

MCB36

• 3656 sq cm total grill area • Foldaway design • High pressure burner unaffected by wind • External Dimensions: 910 W 660 D 850 H • NB. 2 Year Parts

• Ideal for smaller establishments • Grill area 710 x 533mm • c/w roll dome, bun rack, end shelf & cover • External Dimensions: 965 W 711 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• Ideal for smaller catering establishments • Grill area 860 x 533mm • c/w roll dome, bun rack & removable end shelf • External Dimensions: 1118 W 711 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

MCB48

CATERER

MCB72

• For busier caterers, golf clubs & rental • Grill area 1168 x 533mm • c/w roll dome, bun rack & removable end shelf • External Dimensions: 1422 W 711 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

• 7312 sq cm total grill area • Foldaway design • High pressure burners unaffected by wind • External Dimensions: 1715 W 660 D 794 H • NB. 2 Year Parts

• For volume caterers, hotels & country clubs • Grill area 1778 x 533mm • c/w 2x roll dome, 2x bun rack & end shelf • External Dimensions: 2057 W 711 D 915 H • On Site Warranty

CROWN VERITY ACCESSORIES

BI36

Show the true versatility of the Crown Verity Professional Barbecue System by choosing from a wide range of accessories. Call our Sales Team for a full list of accessories available.

• Designed to be built in • Create a complete outdoor kitchen! • Grill area 860 x 533mm • External Dimensions: 991 W 686 D 451 H • On Site Warranty

BM60

• BBQ Covers

• Griddles

•Rotisseries

• For real charcoal grilling enthusiasts • Grill area 1524 x 610mm • Adjustable grill height • Heavy duty steel enamel construction • External Dimensions: 1829 W 610 D 787 H

and many more...

70


MBI80

MCB60

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Outdoor Cooking, Hand Wash & Cigarette Bins

• The ultimate complete outdoor kitchen! • 36” grill, side burner & storage included • Stylish stainless steel design • External Dimensions: 2015 W 621 D 1319 H • On Site Warranty

Crown Verity have a range of barbecues to suit every user and the MCB60 is a real favourite for the larger caterer, golf club or hotel. Extremely versatile, this BBQ system converts into many different cooking options on demand with the wide range of accessories available. Built to the highest standards throughout, with 300 series top grade stainless steel and a 10 year warranty on the burners and grates! A Crown Verity barbecue can pay for itself in a very short time indeed!

• For pigs up to 80kg • Can also be used for lambs, turkeys, joints etc • Electric drive with manual spit handle • External Dimensions: 680 W 2140 D 1130 H • On Site Warranty

• For larger caterers, golf clubs & hotels • c/w 2x roll dome, 2x bun rack & end shelf • External Dimensions: 1753 W 711 D 915 H

SPUDDY BUDDY

76100

CVEHS

• 60 potato cooking capacity • Portable catering system for baked potatoes • Twin fan oven • External Dimensions: 1560 W 700 D 1700 H • Parts Only

• Mobile handwash sink • 85 uses from one fill • Infra red operation • External Dimensions: 390 W 415 D 1015 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Provides more than 300 hand washes! • 64 litre capacity • Manual fill with cold or warm water • External Dimensions: 460 W 560 D 1575 H • Parts Only

MWB

MCB1SS

MCB2SS

• Mobile unit for outside catering • 25 litre capacity • Maintains 42°C water temperature • External Dimensions: 553 W 545 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

• Wall mounted • Approx 3500 cigarette capacity • Easy to empty • Lockable • External Dimensions: 200 W 100 D 250 H

• Freestanding tower • Approx 10,000 cigarette capacity • Easy to empty • Lockable • External Dimensions: 200 W 200 D 880 H

See P7, or contact our Sales Team for details on how to create your perfect Outdoor Kitchen... • Grill area 1473 x 533mm • High quality stainless steel construction • On Site Warranty

Outdoor Catering

HOG ROAST

71


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Buying Guide

Food preparation equipment might take up a relatively small amount of space in a kitchen, but the capabilities in terms of helping caterers make light work of many of tasks has a big impact, not only on efficiency but on the final dishes produced too. There is a wide range of equipment available, and it depends on the style of food on offer and the type and format of raw ingredients bought in that will help determine what an operation needs. Many caterers prefer to prepare their own fresh fruit and vegetables to be used in recipes/dishes than buy in ready prepared, so they need the equipment to reflect this. This equipment has a key role to play in helping to create nutritious, appealing meals and drinks and includes sophisticated juicers, veg prep machines, food processors, blenders – table top and stick, mixers and slicers, down to the more basic pieces. A lot of equipment can become multifunctional with the addition of optional extras - for example, mixers can be used across many applications – from mixing dough for pizza bases or bread to blending vegetables, simply by changing attachments. Technological advancements have allowed for new functions to be developed, such as in mixers for example, auto timers, auto bowl lifts and safety interlocks, improving performance even further, enabling reduced production times and consistent results.

Advantages • By investing in the right prep equipment, caterers have the flexibility and adaptability to handle fluctuations in demand, vary menus, be more creative and enhance presentation. • Easily and inexpensively keep up with new food trends and create added value, higher margin offerings – for example, smoothies or slice own cooked meats. • Although these pieces will still need hands on operation or supervision, they do make light work of laborious tasks, saving staff valuable time and effort and allowing them to get on with other aspects of food preparation– increasing efficiency.

Buying Tips By choosing the right model and maintaining it, you can expect it to last around 2-5 years. • Which equipment? - Be clear on the intended use, work out what pieces will save the most time and effort based upon current and future menus – the ingredients used and style of cooking and therefore be the most cost effective choice. Look at the volume of throughput too and variations/peaks in service times, the size and space in the kitchen and the skill level of staff. Ensure the equipment is large and powerful enough to undertake the daily tasks – it’s better to have a more powerful machine running at three quarters capacity than an underpowered one running flat out. Look for versatility - multiple tasks from one machine. • Build quality and reliability - Regardless of size or duty, sturdy manufacture is a ‘must’ choose a well-known commercial brand - anything else won’t perform or last. These brands usually offer the most innovative and technologically advanced equipment with intelligent and energy saving features. Consider also the availability of spare parts and after sales service, plus what length of warranty is available. • Operational features - Ease of cleaning - removable parts aid hygiene safety. Ease of use, as varying skill levels will be using the equipment. Safety aspects of operation – guards fitted, temperature controls. Flexibility for adaptable service – look at attachments available for multi-tasking. Variable speeds for greater control and versatility.

72

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


5KPM5

602037 (e-mix)

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Mixers

• 4.8 litre capacity • Planetary action • Direct drive motor • External Dimensions: 264 W 338 D 411 H • Workshop Warranty

An R H Hall Wholesale Exclusive, the E-Mix can handle the smallest of tasks - a minimum of 1-2 egg whites, up to a max of 1.5kg of bread dough. Power of 500W generates a variable speed of 40-240rpm. Supplied with bowl, semi-spiral hook, paddle & whisk – all stainless steel & dishwasher safe, with a Type K attachment hub for accessories, such as mincers & pasta kits. Ergonomically designed throughout, the bowl has 2 handles for ease of use. Safety is also of prime importance & a patented bowl lift system links to the bowl guard when opening.

• 5 litre capacity • Planetary mixing action • Gear driven • External Dimensions: 240 W 410 D 425 H • Workshop Warranty

• 5 litre capacity • Electronic speed variator • External Dimensions: 284 W 382 D 434 H

5KSM7990W

BE8

SP80

• 6.9 litre capacity • 1.3 HP motor • 40-200 RPM • External Dimensions: 371 W 287 D 417 H • Workshop Warranty

• 8 litre capacity • Planetary • Electronic speed variator • External Dimensions: 292 W 420 D 530 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 litre capacity • Planetary mixing action • 3 speed gearbox • External Dimensions: 300 W 400 D 580 H • Limited On Site Warranty

V10

BE10

BM10

• 10 litre capacity • Digital control panel • Timer with auto stop • External Dimensions: 332 W 450 D 540 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • 3kg capacity in flour • 0-30 minute electronic timer • External Dimensions: 410 W 523 D 688 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • Planetary mixing action • 0.25kW 1/3HP motor • External Dimensions: 400 W 450 D 630 H • On Site Warranty

• Planetary • 40-240 rpm variable speed • On Site Warranty

Food Preparation

SM5

73


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Mixers SP100

XBE10

V20

• 10 litre capacity • Planetary mixing action • 3 speed gearbox • External Dimensions: 370 W 450 D 600 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • Planetary • Electronic speed variation • External Dimensions: 453 W 605 D 686 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 litre capacity • Digital control panel • Timer with auto stop • External Dimensions: 520 W 520 D 910 H • On Site Warranty

BE20

BM20

XBM20

• 20 litre capacity • 6kg capacity in flour • 0-30 minute electronic timer • External Dimensions: 520 W 733 D 1152 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 litre capacity • Planetary mixing action • 0.38kW 1/2HP motor • External Dimensions: 375 W 526 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 litre capacity • Planetary • Mechanical speed variation • External Dimensions: 521 W 685 D 1010 H • On Site Warranty

SP200

BE30

• 30 litre capacity • 9kg capacity in flour • 0-30 minute electronic timer • External Dimensions: 528 W 764 D 1152 H • On Site Warranty

BE40

Particularly suitable for bakeries, hotels, restaurants, canteens etc, the SP200 is a heavy duty bench mounted, gear driven planetary mixer with a powerful 3-speed transmission. Fully CE approved with an electrically interlocked bowl guard and bowl lift.

• 20 litre capacity • 3 speed gearbox • Resettable thermal overload • External Dimensions: 410 W 470 D 800 H

74

• Planetary mixing action • Emergency stop • c/w bowl, beater, whisk & dough hook • On Site Warranty

• 40 litre capacity • 12kg capacity in flour • 0-30 minute electronic timer • External Dimensions: 586 W 777 D 1202 H • On Site Warranty


CL40

TRS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Veg Prep Machines

• 20-80 covers • 500W induction motor • 500rpm • External Dimensions: 304 W 320 D 590 H • Workshop Warranty

Suitable for 100-400 meals for table service and up to 800 meals for catering service, the TRS has been a veg prep favourite for many years. Supplied with an ejector and a wide range of discs available to purchase.

• Up to 300 covers • 375rpm • 550W induction motor • External Dimensions: 350 W 320 D 590 H • Workshop Warranty

• Up to 300 covers • No volt release system • External Dimensions: 252 W 557 D 502 H

CL50U

CL52

CA301

• Up to 300 covers • 375rpm • 550W induction motor • External Dimensions: 350 W 320 D 590 H • Workshop Warranty

• Up to 400 covers • 375rpm • 750W induction motor • External Dimensions: 250 W 360 D 640 H • Workshop Warranty

• Up to 450 covers • 150-450kg per hour • 550W motor • External Dimensions: 389 W 405 D 544 H • On Site Warranty

CK301

CA401

TRK55

• Up to 450 covers • 150-450kg per hour • 550W motor • External Dimensions: 389 W 405 D 544 H • On Site Warranty

• Up to 600 covers • 200-650kg per hour • 550W motor • External Dimensions: 389 W 382 D 646 H • On Site Warranty

• Up to 800 covers • Veg prep, cutter mixer & emulsifier in 1! • Veg prep: 4 speeds up to 430 RPM • External Dimensions: 252 W 485 D 725 H • On Site Warranty

• 500W motor • Motor stops when feed arm or lid is opened • On Site Warranty

Food Preparation

CL50

75


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Veg Prep Machines & Potato Peelers CL55

CL60

VQ3.5

• Up to 3000 covers • 375rpm • 900W induction motor • External Dimensions: 480 W 350 D 665 H • Workshop Warranty

• Up to 3000 covers • 375/750rpm • 1500W induction motor • External Dimensions: 600 W 720 D 1225 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3.5kg capacity • Up to 35kg per hour • 0.25kW motor • External Dimensions: 655 W 390 D 425 H • On Site Warranty

10

PP6

15

• 4.5kg capacity • Produces 4.5kg every 6 mins • Aluminium Finish • External Dimensions: 348 W 555 D 370 H • On Site Warranty

• 6kg capacity • 120-150kg per hour • 0-6 minute timer • External Dimensions: 395 W 700 D 433 H • On Site Warranty

• 6.8kg capacity • Produces 6.8kg every 6 mins • Aluminum Finish • External Dimensions: 348 W 555 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

VQ7

601071

• 8kg capacity • 110kg per hour • 0.37kW motor • External Dimensions: 395 W 695 D 539 H • On Site Warranty

PP12

The VQ Peelers’ compact and flexible design, small footprint and quiet running motor enable them to be used in the smallest of kitchens whilst their simple and safe operation make them a pleasure to use. What’s more, the peeling chambers are interchangeable enabling you to up-size or down-size without having to buy a completely new Peeler. The VQ7 is a powerful Peeler in a compact package, offering a capacity of 7kg and an output of 50kg per hour. Simple and safe to operate, it saves both time and space, while its robust and low maintenance design saves you money, too.

• 7kg capacity • 0.25kW motor • External Dimensions: 655 W 390 D 495 H

76

• Up to 50kg per hour • Integral timer • On Site Warranty

• 12kg capacity • 220-270kg per hour • 0-6 minute timer • External Dimensions: 395 W 700 D 503 H • On Site Warranty


SP12

PC2

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Potato Peelers, Chippers & Food Processors

• 12kg capacity • Up to 120kg/hour • 0.37kW motor • External Dimensions: 404 W 560 D 1120 H • On Site Warranty

The PC2 Chipper is one of the fastest Potato Chippers available, producing 25kg of chips per minute, with mimimum waste. Interchangeable knife and scallop blocks offer a choice of four chip sizes and one scallop size. The large hopper makes loading easy, yet the PC2 Chipper is compact enough for drainer, worktop, or stand-mounting in any size kitchen.

• 100 - 150kg/hour output • Manual operation • Ideal for restaurants and large kitchens • External Dimensions: 280 W 512 D 735 H • On Site Warranty

• 25kg per minute output • 0.18kW motor • Full safety interlocks • External Dimensions: 370 W 640 D 545 H

CSC1

EC12

R101 XL

• 25kg per minute output • 12.5kg loading capacity • 0.18kW motor • External Dimensions: 400 W 687 D 530 H • On Site Warranty

• 25kg per minute output • 12kg hopper load • 0.18kW belt drive motor • External Dimensions: 370 W 550 D 715 H • On Site Warranty

• 1.9 litre bowl • 450W motor • 1500rpm • External Dimensions: 220 W 300 D 450 H • Workshop Warranty

R201 XL

R201U XL

601341

• 2.9 litre bowl • 550W induction motor • 1500rpm • External Dimensions: 220 W 280 D 495 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2.9 litre bowl • 550W induction motor • 1500rpm • External Dimensions: 220 W 280 D 495 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2.5 litre capacity • Combined veg prep machine and cutter mixer • 1500 rpm • External Dimensions: 216 W 347 D 412 H • On Site Warranty

• 12kg approx hopper load • 6, 10, 12, 14 & 17x14mm blocks available • Easy to clean • On Site Warranty

Food Preparation

CF5

77


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Food Processors R211U XL

R301

R301U

• 2.9 litre bowl • 550W induction motor • 1500rpm • External Dimensions: 220 W 360 D 445 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3.7 litre ABS bowl • 650W motor - 1500rpm • Stainless steel blade • External Dimensions: 220 W 340 D 550 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3.7 litre stainless steel bowl & blade • 650W motor - 1500rpm • Pulse function • External Dimensions: 220 W 340 D 550 H • Workshop Warranty

R401

R402

R502

• 4.5 litre bowl • 700W motor • 1500rpm • External Dimensions: 320 W 304 D 725 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4.5 litre bowl • 750W motor • 750/1500rpm • External Dimensions: 320 W 304 D 745 H • Workshop Warranty

• 5.5 litre bowl • 1000W motor • 750/1500rpm • External Dimensions: 280 W 350 D 480 H • Workshop Warranty

ROBOT COOK

R652

• 7 litre bowl • 1200W induction motor • 750/1500rpm • External Dimensions: 426 W 481 D 880 H • Workshop Warranty

R652VV

You can emulsify, grind, blend, chop, mix and knead to perfection with the new Robot Cook®, the only professional cooking cutter blender on the market. It is the ideal appliance, whether the recipes you are making are hot or cold, sweet or savoury. Chefs will love its combination of high speed and enviable cutting quality, plus its ability to heat ingredients to a temperature of 140°C, especially since it is accurate to within one degree. Its generously sized 3.7 litre stainless steel bowl is perfect for the needs of professionals.

• Preps & cooks sauces, custards and more! • 3.7 litre bowl • Anti vapour lid • Emulsifies, grinds and mixes • Removable scraper arm • Workshop Warranty

78

• 140°C cooking precision • Micro serrated blade • 4500rpm silent induction motor • Chops, blends and kneads • External Dimensions: 226 W 338 D 522 H

• 7 litre bowl • 1500W motor • 300-3500rpm variable speed • External Dimensions: 426 W 481 D 880 H • Workshop Warranty


HBF500UK

HBF500SUK

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Kitchen & Stick Blenders

• 1.4 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • 1 hp motor with 2 speeds + pulse • External Dimensions: 178 W 203 D 457 H • Workshop Warranty

Ideal for chopping, grinding, pureeing, blending and emulsifying in any commercial kitchen - the HBF500SUK has a powerful, high torque 1hp motor and the integrated timer automatically turns the blender off after a pre-set time has elapsed. Unique wave action™ keeps ingredients circulating through the blades to ensure contents are well blended and there is a dosing cup included in the lid, which allows the operator to easily add ingredients while blending.

• 1.9 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • High torque 3 hp motor • External Dimensions: 178 W 203 D 457 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.8 litre capacity • 1 hp motor with 2 speeds + pulse • External Dimensions: 178 W 203 D 457 H

X3

XB409

HMI200UK

• 2.5 litre capacity • Stainless steel jug • 0.6kW motor • External Dimensions: 200 W 200 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 litre capacity • Stainless steel jug • 1.3kW motor • External Dimensions: 230 W 250 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• 225mm shaft length • Stainless steel shaft • Detachable shaft • External Dimensions: 76W 76D 445H • Workshop Warranty

RAPIMIX200

TR200

TR250

• 200mm shaft length • Stainless steel shaft & blade • 2 speeds 15,000 & 20,000 RPM • External Dimensions: 380 H • Workshop Warranty

• 200mm shaft length • Up to 10 litre container capacity • Speed 9000rpm • External Dimensions: 485 H • Workshop Warranty

• 265mm shaft length • Up to 20 litre container capacity • Speed 9000rpm • External Dimensions: 150 dia. 550 H • Workshop Warranty

• Stainless steel container • Integrated timer • Workshop Warranty

Food Preparation

HBF600UK

79


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Stick Blenders CMP250VV

CMP250 COMBI

CMP300VV

• 250mm shaft length • 15 litre pan capacity • Variable speed 4800-9600rpm • External Dimensions: 94 dia. 650 H • Workshop Warranty

• 250mm shaft length • 15 litre pan capacity • Stainless steel whisk attachment • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 705 H • Workshop Warranty

• 300mm shaft length • 30 litre pan capacity • Variable speed 4800-9600rpm • External Dimensions: 94 dia. 660 H • Workshop Warranty

MP350VV

TR350BN

B3000/450W

• 350mm shaft length • 50 litre pan capacity • Variable speed 1500-9000rpm • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 740 H • Workshop Warranty

• 377mm shaft length • Up to 40 litre container capacity • Speed 9000rpm • External Dimensions: 200 dia. 732 H • Workshop Warranty

• 450mm shaft length • 10,000 RPM variable speed • Smart Speed Control system • Electronic speed variator • On Site Warranty

MP450

MP450 COMBI

• 450mm shaft length • 100 litre pan capacity • Stainless steel whisk attachment • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 890 H • Workshop Warranty

MP450 FW

With a pan capacity of up to 100 litres, the MP450 is suitable for a wide range of catering applications. Designed to be hygienic, robust and easy to maintain, Robot Coupe have an option for all users in their vast range of Stick Blenders.

• 450mm shaft length • 9000rpm • Removable foot and blade • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 840 H

80

• 100 litre pan capacity • Watertight foot • Stainless steel wall support included • Workshop Warranty

• 450mm shaft length • 100 litre pan capacity • Variable speed 250-1900rpm • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 800 H • Workshop Warranty


RAPIMIX 500

HB650UK

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Stick & Bar Blenders

• 500mm shaft length • Stainless steel shaft & blade • Ergonomic design • External Dimensions: 760 H • Workshop Warranty

The Hamilton Beach HB650UK is a powerful speciality blender designed for high volume users. Capable of fast, powerful, high density blending providing consistent product quality for multiple operating sites and a wide variety of recipes - for example, a 12 second daiquiri mix using full ice cubes. Wave-Action™ system forces the mixture down to the blades ensuring smooth blending and this model is ideal for all frozen drinks, cocktails, smoothies, iced coffee, ice cream drinks and thick milkshakes.

• 550mm shaft length • 200 litre pan capacity • 9000rpm • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 940 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2 litre capacity • Powerful 3 hp motor • External Dimensions: 178 W 203 D 457 H

TR550BXL

MP600

B1

• 585mm shaft length • Up to 150 litre container capacity • 9000 rpm • External Dimensions: 885 H • Workshop Warranty

• 600mm shaft length • 300 litre pan capacity • 9000rpm • External Dimensions: 125 dia. 980 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1 litre capacity • Polycarbonate jug • 0.6kW motor • External Dimensions: 200 W 200 D 410 H • Workshop Warranty

HB250SUK

HB250UK

HB908UK

• 1 litre capacity • Stainless steel container • Powerful 1/2 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 203 D 394 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.3 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • Powerful 1/2 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 203 D 406 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.3 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • Powerful 3/8 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 203 D 387 H • Workshop Warranty

• Lexan container • Timer • Workshop Warranty

Food Preparation

MP550

81


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Bar Blenders, Drink Mixers & Ice HB450UK

XB98

B210

• 1.3 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • Powerful 1 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 229 D 432 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.5 litre capacity • Stainless steel jug • 0.6kW motor • External Dimensions: 200 W 200 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.5 litre capacity • Polycarbonate jug • 1.3kW motor • External Dimensions: 180 W 210 D 420 H • Workshop Warranty

HB850UK

HB1200UK

M98

• 2 litre capacity • Lexan container • Powerful 3 hp motor • External Dimensions: 229 W 305 D 483 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2 litre capacity • Lexan container • Powerful 3 hp motor • External Dimensions: 330 W 432 D 762 H • Workshop Warranty

• Single spindle • 0.3kW fan cooled universal motor • 15000 rpm • External Dimensions: 200 W 220 D 450 H • Workshop Warranty

V90

HMD200

• Single spindle • Stainless steel container • 3 speed • External Dimensions: 165 W 171 D 521 H • Workshop Warranty

HMD400

Ideal for bars and cocktail preparation, the V90 has a 2kg/minute capacity with an output of up to 30kg per day, perfect for providing the versatility of crushed ice on demand. A highly polished chrome finish means this machine looks stylish and professional in a front of house situation.

• 2kg per minute output • Suitable for hollow ice only • Sturdy and quick • External Dimensions: 210 W 230 D 460 H

82

• 0.1kW fan cooled motor • Die cast motor housing • For the preparation of frozen cocktails • Workshop Warranty

• Triple spindle • Stainless steel container x 3 • 3 speed • External Dimensions: 312 W 229 D 521 H • Workshop Warranty


V100

NCE1-MC3

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ice, Juicers, Knife Sharpeners & Can Openers

• 6kg per minute output • 0.3kW gear driven motor • Suitable for hollow ice only • External Dimensions: 240 W 340 D 470 H • Workshop Warranty

This electric knife sharpener offers an easy and convenient way for chefs to ensure they are always getting the maximum from one of the most essential tools in any kitchen! An abrasive 2 wheel system offers faster sharpening and this bench mounted model is easy to use and maintain. An optional wall holder is available for permanent placement.

• 2kg per minute output • 0.3kW motor • Prepares ice for slush drinks & cocktails • External Dimensions: 210 W 450 D 430 H • Workshop Warranty

• Abrasive 2 wheel system for faster sharpening • Bench mounted • c/w 2 abrasive wheels and 20 abrasive belts • External Dimensions: 310 W 110 D 120 H

SL98

ES500

ES700

• 1400 rpm • 0.3kW motor with thermal cut out • Single speed • External Dimensions: 230 W 200 D 350 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3000 rpm • High speed 0.7kW motor • Single speed • External Dimensions: 240 W 380 D 490 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3000 rpm • 0.8kW fan cooled motor • Single speed • External Dimensions: 280 W 440 D 510 H • Workshop Warranty

715000

712100

U12

• Manual • Up to 50 cans per day recommended usage • Rustproof • External Dimensions: 90 W 210 D 530 H • Workshop Warranty

• Manual • Up to 15 cans per day recommended usage • Plated base • External Dimensions: 100 W 200 D 410 H • Workshop Warranty

• Manual • Up to 50 cans per day recommended usage • Quick change gear & stainless steel shaft • NSF Certified • Workshop Warranty

• Portable • Safe & easy to use • Shown with optional wall holder • Parts Only

Food Preparation

G30

83


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Slicers, Graters & Pasta Makers MS220SG

NS220

MIRRA 250S

• 8” blade • Chrome plated steel blade • Blade removal tool • External Dimensions: 520 W 460 D 380 H • On Site Warranty

• 8” blade • Chrome plated carbon steel blade • Maximum slice thickness 12mm • External Dimensions: 590 W 430 D 370 H • Workshop Warranty

• 10” blade • Gravity feed • Permanent knife guard • External Dimensions: 570 W 560 D 475 H • On Site Warranty

NS250

MIRRA 300S

NS300

• 10” blade • Chrome plated carbon steel blade • Maximum slice thickness 12mm • External Dimensions: 590 W 430 D 410 H • Workshop Warranty

• 12” blade • Gravity feed • Permanent knife guard • External Dimensions: 640 W 610 D 510 H • On Site Warranty

• 12” blade • Chrome plated carbon steel blade • Maximum slice thickness 12mm • External Dimensions: 630 W 440 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

MS250SG

GSD

• 50kg per hour output • For any hard cheese, bread, nuts & biscuits • 140 x 80mm grating chamber • External Dimensions: 270 W 380 D 370 H • Workshop Warranty

PM1.5

Get the perfect cut with a slicer to suit all applications, offering great quality at an affordable price. Ideal for restaurants, cafes, coffee shops, delicatessens & bars. Constructed for maximum durability with an anodised aluminium body & high quality hardened chromium plated steel blade, the range also has additional features designed for total operator safety. No more issues with differing thickness of cuts, the range has fine dial adjustment & in-built sharpener to keep the blade sharp for precision.

• 10” blade • Blade removal tool • External Dimensions: 520 W 460 D 380 H

84

• Chrome plated steel blade • Blade sharpener • On Site Warranty

• 1.5kg capacity • 5kg hourly production • 50mm diameter nozzle • External Dimensions: 250 W 290 D 480 H • Workshop Warranty


HP130

PS12

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Burger Presses, Mincers & Thermometers

• 130mm plate • Heavy duty • Lever operated • External Dimensions: 235 W 280 D 240 H • Workshop Warranty

With an hourly output of up to 100kg, the Sammic PS12 Mincer includes a knife and 6mm diameter mesh plate as standard. The motor and cutting unit are both manufactured in aluminium, with a body and hopper in stainless steel. This model is ideal for any foodservice or retail application.

• 70-80kg per hour output • 0.67 HP • 62mm hole plate diameter • External Dimensions: 180 W 335 D 335 H • Parts Only

• 100kg per hour output • Supplied with cutter knife and 6mm plate • External Dimensions: 227 W 470 D 410 H

TS22

STC22

PS22

• 200kg per hour output • 70mm plate size • 6mm mincing plate included • External Dimensions: 220 W 1370 D 440 H • Workshop Warranty

• 300kg per hour output • 1.1kW 1.5HP motor power • Stainless steel feedbox and meat pick up tray • External Dimensions: 300 W 450 D 360 H • Workshop Warranty

• 280kg per hour output • 82mm mesh plate diameter • Supplied with cutter knife and 6mm plate • External Dimensions: 310 W 440 D 480 H • On Site Warranty

C12

CATERCHECK3

FP

• -40 to +125°C temperature range • Penetration and air probes supplied • Choice of 5 HACCP colours included • External Dimensions: 58 W 27 D 152 H • Workshop Warranty

• -50 to +150°C temperature range • Fixed probe for solid or semi-solid foods • Battery lasts up to 5 years • External Dimensions: 58 W 27 D 152 H • Workshop Warranty

• -30 to +200°C temperature range • Infrared • Scan without risk of cross contamination • External Dimensions: 30 W 50 D 150 H • Workshop Warranty

• 70mm mesh plate diameter • Aluminium cutting unit • On Site Warranty

Food Preparation

OMTS8

85


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Vacuum Packers & Scales SVT-300CVP

SV-310T

SVT-CUCINA300

• 300mm sealing bar • Dry rocker piston pump • Suitable for dry foods & liquids • External Dimensions: 359 W 450 D 378 H • Workshop Warranty

• Stainless steel chamber • 314mm sealing bar • Light, non continuous use only • External Dimensions: 323 W 475 D 355 H • On Site Warranty

• 300mm sealing bar • 8m3/hr vacuum pump • Suitable for dry foods & liquids • External Dimensions: 370 W 530 D 250 H • Workshop Warranty

SV-410T

SVT-CUCINA400

SV-420T

• Stainless steel chamber • 414mm sealing bar • Chamber dimensions 430 x 415 x 145mm • External Dimensions: 500 W 500 D 413 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm sealing bar • 18m3/hr vacuum pump • Suitable for dry foods & liquids • External Dimensions: 470 W 550 D 430 H • Workshop Warranty

• Stainless steel chamber • 414mm sealing bar • Chamber dimensions 430 x 415 x 180mm • External Dimensions: 500 W 500 D 460 H • On Site Warranty

SV-520T

DSCALES

• 4kg capacity • Spring balance • For light commercial use • External Dimensions: 150 W 260 D 270 H • Workshop Warranty

CW5

Sammic commercial vacuum packing machines allow operators to improve the durability of cooked or raw food, with no loss of weight. A digital keyboard, with all functions controlled by an electronic timer, controls the vacuum process and the sealing of the pack to match the preset time. With stainless steel body and chamber, all Sammic vacuum packing machines are equipped with cordless sealing bars, making cleaning easy and comfortable.

• Stainless steel chamber • 2 mbar max vacuum pressure • Digital keyboard • External Dimensions: 642 W 481 D 455 H

86

• 414mm sealing bar • Electronic timer • Chamber dimensions 560 x 422 x 180mm • On Site Warranty

• 5kg capacity • Mechanical dial showing weight in kg and lb • 20g increments • External Dimensions: 280 W 170 D 280 H • Workshop Warranty


CW10

WSC-10 POSEIDON

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Scales

• 10kg capacity • Mechanical dial showing weight in kg and lb • 50g increments • External Dimensions: 280 W 170 D 280 H • Workshop Warranty

This innovative scale features a rugged waterproof design, ensuring it can handle the harshest environments. Fully submersible for easy cleaning and self calibrating to reduce any maintenance, this model features patented technology to bring innovation to any foodservice application.

• 20kg capacity • Mechanical dial showing weight in kg and lb • 100g increments • External Dimensions: 280 W 170 D 280 H • Workshop Warranty

• 5kg capacity • 1g increments • Operates on mains or 4xAA batteries (not inc) • Adjustable levelling feet with bubble level • Workshop Warranty

SJ-1000EC

FS-6Ki EC

EW3

• 1kg capacity • Large 25mm LCD display • Battery or plug operated • External Dimensions: 265 W 250 D 103 H • Workshop Warranty

• 6kg x 2g (legal for trade) • 18.6mm backlit LCD display • Mains or optional re-chargeable battery • External Dimensions: 250 W 414 D 496 H • Workshop Warranty

• 3kg capacity • Weighs in kg and lb • Clear LCD display • External Dimensions: 220 W 220 D 190 H • Workshop Warranty

SJ-12K EC

SJ-15KWP

EW11

• 10kg/12kg capacity • Large 25mm LCD display • Battery or plug operated • External Dimensions: 265 W 250 D 103 H • Workshop Warranty

• 6kg/15kg x 2g/5g dual range • Large 26mm LCD display • 6 x D size battery • External Dimensions: 236 W 260 D 148 H • Workshop Warranty

• 11kg capacity • Weighs in kg and lb • Clear LCD display • External Dimensions: 220 W 220 D 190 H • Workshop Warranty

• Digital display • Submersible • Programmable • Self calibrating

Food Preparation

CW20P

87


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Preparation

Scales & Waste Disposal SK-2000WP EC

EW20

SJ-3000WP

• 2kg capacity • Large & clear 25mm LCD display • Battery powered (not included) • External Dimensions: 230 W 232 D 137 H • Workshop Warranty

• 20kg capacity • Weighs in kg and lb • Clear LCD display • External Dimensions: 220 W 220 D 190 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1500g/3000g x 0.5g/1g dual range • Large 26mm LCD display • 6 x D size battery • External Dimensions: 236 W 260 D 148 H • Workshop Warranty

SK-5001WP

523

525

• 5kg capacity • Large & clear 25mm LCD display • Battery powered (not included) • External Dimensions: 230 W 232 D 137 H • Workshop Warranty

• Sink mounted • 200 covers per sitting • 100kg waste per hour • External Dimensions: 89 W sink opening 406 H • On Site Warranty

• Table mounted • 400 covers per sitting • 200kg waste per hour • External Dimensions: 330 W 355 D 630 H • On Site Warranty

WASTESTATION

526

• Freestanding • 400 covers per sitting • 200kg waste per hour • External Dimensions: 400 W 600 D 865 H • On Site Warranty

725

Food waste disposal costs can be an avoidable cost with this Food Waste Processing System from IMC. Reduce your rubbish, minimise your impact on the environment and cut your food waste disposal costs by up to 80%!

• Macerates and dewaters food waste • Reduces food waste volume by up to 80% • Self cleaning operation • Visual control panel • External Dimensions: 1000 W 700 D 900 H

88

• Centrifugal action forces out excess liquid • Self rinse system • Self emptying • Intelligent electronic sensor • On Site Warranty

• Table mounted • 850 covers per sitting • 400kg waste per hour • External Dimensions: 338 W 474 D 725 H • On Site Warranty


This equipment is the perfect solution for those catering on a larger scale, where the volume of covers dictates the need for holding dishes ready for service, such as in schools or universities or for foodservice operations where food or plated meals need to be transported and held at the right temperatures before serving in locations remote from their kitchens such as in hospitals, care homes or banqueting in hotels. Keeping freshly cooked food at the correct temperatures for serving is harder than it sounds and you need the right equipment to do it, as food safety is of paramount importance as is keeping the food in fresh condition too. It’s about getting the right cabinet for the menu/dishes served. For example, if certain cooked foods are susceptible to drying out, then a dry heat cabinet will make them even dryer over a period of time, so a cabinet that has a humidifier that injects a small amount of moisture in the cupboard cavity will be best. Whereas foods with high moisture content such as pasta dishes, or high fat content, such as pies and sausage rolls will keep well in dry heat cupboards. And it’s not just about heat, chilled cabinets are available too and once again the same food safety compliance applies. Gantries, bain marie tops and hot cupboards can also play a vital role in keeping foods ready for service, helping to accommodate any peaks or lengthy service periods.

Advantages • Food and plated meals can be prepared in advance of service times and held safely, in optimum conditions until required, helping kitchen efficiency and service throughput. • Reduces food wastage as foods are held in optimum conditions, so they will stay fresh and attractive looking from the start of service to the very end. • Difficult or remote dining locations can easily be catered for. • Food safe and food hygiene compliant.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Caterers should assess their needs in line with their operation – what food is served, where and when, the throughput, length of service and any peaks. Also be mindful of any future plans to change menus, expand operations or change layouts. Consider where the equipment can be stored, when not in use and for mobile cupboards, look at door widths to ensure they will get through – look at compact or narrower models if required. Capacities are determined by how many plated meals or plates stacked each cupboard will take. • Build quality and reliability – Choose a leading brand with an established reputation for good quality, durability and reliability. This way you will ensure compliance with all the relevant food safety regulations. These brands usually build in great operational features too and energy efficiency, which should always be considered. Look for a full manufacturer’s warranty – the minimum being at least a year. Check the availability of spare parts and after sales service. • Operational features – Look for solid stainless steel construction, double skinned, fully insulated cabinets for greater energy efficiency. Good heat/chill recovery time, gastronorm compatible, fan assisted or forced/blown air are for even temperature distribution, digital electronic temperature controls and visible temperature display, adjustable and removable shelves. For mobile units look for solid castors, push bar and plug park. For gantries and hot cupboards, halogen or quartz lighting to enhance display, infra-red heat lamps, sneeze guards, variable temperature controls.

Food Service Equipment

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Buying Guide

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty

89


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Service Equipment

Hot Cupboards JUPITER

GEMINI

TAURUS

• Holds up to 32 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 4 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 380 W 600 D 1250 H • Parts Only

• Holds up to 22 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 3 removable chromed shelves • External Dimensions: 580 W 400 D 850 H • Parts Only

• Holds up to 44 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 3 removable chromed shelves • External Dimensions: 580 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

ORION2

APOLLO2

1888

• Holds up to 54 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 760 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

• Holds up to 30 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 760 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

• 270 x 10” plates or up to 40 plated meals • Thermostat • 3 removable chrome wire shelves • External Dimensions: 845 W 625 D 970 H • On Site Warranty

ORION3

P6P2

• 236 x 10” plate capacity or 36 plated meals • Plain top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 900 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

1887

Part of the Galaxy range, the ORION3 is strongly built in stainless steel with insulated panels throughout and is a versatile, cost effective solution to keep hot food, hot! Operating from a 13amp plug at just 1.5kW, the 2 metre cable can be positioned to the LH or RH side of the unit for easy on site access. A wide range of accessories including gantries, push bars and castors are available on request. • Holds up to 72 x 10” plated meals • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 1090 W 600 D 850 H

90

• Thermostat • 2 sliding doors • Parts Only

• 240 x 10” plates or up to 30 plated meals • Thermostat • c/w 3 x 1/3 & 4 x 1/4 GN bains marie top • External Dimensions: 845 W 625 D 975 H • On Site Warranty


MSB9

HC20MS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Hot Cupboards

• 210 x 10” plates or up to 42 plated meals • 2 shelves • 30-85°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 900 W 610 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

This general purpose, plain top hot cupboard is suitable for use in all commercial catering establishments and demonstrates the expertise that Victor have, following 50 years in the food service market. With a capacity of 36 plated meals, or 258 x 10” plates, this compact model provides an ideal starting point for any operator who does not want to compromise on quality.

• 222 x 10” plate capacity or 33 plated meals • Wet or dry bain marie top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 900 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 258 x 10” plate capacity or 36 plated meals • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 980 W 670 D 900 H

P6P3

HOT12

P6B3

• 316 x 10” plate capacity or 48 plated meals • Plain top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 1125 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 360 x 10” plates or up to 70 plated meals • Thermostat • 2 shelves • External Dimensions: 1200 W 650 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 302 x 10” plate capacity or 45 plated meals • Wet or dry bain marie top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 1125 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

BM30MS

MSB12G

ORION4

• 344 x 10” plate capacity or 48 plated meals • Digital display • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 1285 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Supplied with gantry • 280 x 10” plates or up to 56 plated meals • 2 shelves • External Dimensions: 1290 W 675 D 1360 H • On Site Warranty

• Holds up to 90 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 1420 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

• Digital display • Castors • On Site Warranty

Food Service Equipment

P6B2

91


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Service Equipment

Hot Cupboards & Banquet Carts HOT15

ORION5

APOLLO5

• 450 x 10” plates or up to 90 plated meals • Thermostat • 2 shelves • External Dimensions: 1500 W 650 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Holds up to 108 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 1750 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

• Holds up to 84 x 10” plated meals • Thermostat • 2 removable shelves • External Dimensions: 1750 W 600 D 850 H • Parts Only

P6P5

P6B5

HOT18

• 476 x 10” plate capacity or 72 plated meals • Plain top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 1775 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 462 x 10” plate capacity or 69 plated meals • Wet or dry bain marie top • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 1775 W 670 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 540 x 10” plates or up to 108 plated meals • Thermostat • 2 shelves • External Dimensions: 1800 W 650 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

P6B4

1000-BQ2/96

• 96 x 10” plated meal capacity • 16-93°C temperature range • Halo Heat’ for longer holding life • External Dimensions: 954 W 773 D 1714 H • On Site Warranty

BL100H2

At just 670mm deep, the Lincat Panther range of hot cupboards are designed to fit through narrow doorways, making them ideal for smaller pubs & restaurants, plus nursing or care homes. Remaining large on features, the P6B4 includes a thermostatically controlled Bain Marie top which can be operated via wet or dry heat. Accurate digital electronic control of the hot cupboard temperature, adjustable between 20-99°C, ensures compliance with food hygiene regulations.

• 382 x 10” plate capacity or 57 plated meals • Digital temperature control • External Dimensions: 1450 W 670 D 900 H

92

• Wet or dry bain marie top • Fan assisted • On Site Warranty

• Holds up to 108 10” plates • 4 shelves & supports • Adjustable temperature between 65 - 95°C • External Dimensions: 1070 W 780 D 1810 H • On Site Warranty


FSHC-6W1

500-TH-111

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Food Holding & Transportation

• 6 x 2/1 GN capacity • Humidified • Thermostatically controlled heat & humidity • External Dimensions: 645 W 749 D 816 H • On Site Warranty

This intuitive Cook & Hold oven cooks by time or probe to detect internal product temperature and automatically converts to ‘hold’ mode once the set parameters have been reached. Eight programmable menu buttons can store your favourite recipes, thereby reducing operational requirements. The SureTemp™ heat recovery system ensures immediate compensation for any heat lost when the door is opened and an alarm sounds if left open for more than 3 minutes!

• 10 x 1/1 GN 65mm deep capacity • 16-93°C temperature range • Halo Heat’ for longer holding life • External Dimensions: 653 W 785 D 855 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 x 1/1 GN 65mm deep capacity • Halo Heat’ for longer holding time • External Dimensions: 460 W 672 D 851 H

HDW-2

500-3D

UPCS400

• 2 drawers • Independent thermostat to each drawer • Completely insulated individual cavities • External Dimensions: 749 W 575 D 537 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 drawers • Holds 3 x 1/1 GN pans 150mm deep • 16-93°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 618 W 625 D 663 H • On Site Warranty

• 6 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Holds multiple pans of hold or cold food • Food can be stored for hours • Polyethylene construction • External Dimensions: 460 W 635 D 490 H

UPCH4002

UPC800

CD400

• 6 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • 71°C heat maintains food moisture • Enables HACCP compliance • 45 minute preheat time • External Dimensions: 460 W 670 D 630 H

• 8 x 1/1 GN grid capacity • Holds multiple pans of hold or cold food • Food can be stored for hours • Double compartment • External Dimensions: 520 W 690 D 1145 H

• Transports food carriers (not included) • For UPCS400/UPC800 • 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors • Durable construction • External Dimensions: 530 W 710 D 230 H

• Cooks by time or probe • LED display • On Site Warranty

Food Service Equipment

750-S

93


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Food Service Equipment

Plate Warmers/Dispensers & Food Warmers 1868

1832

1863

• Approx. 90 plate capacity • c/w 3 shelves • Thermostatically controlled • External Dimensions: 375 W 600 D 945 H • On Site Warranty

• Approx. 120 plate capacity • c/w 4 shelves • Thermostatically controlled • External Dimensions: 375 W 600 D 1115 H • On Site Warranty

• Approx. 240 plate capacity • c/w 4 shelves • Thermostatically controlled • External Dimensions: 610 W 600 D 1115 H • On Site Warranty

PDH1

SPC

VHFD

• Capacity approx 60 plates • Heated with lid • 4 castors (2 braked) • External Dimensions: 600 W 400 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 removable wire shelves • Up to 10 pies/shelf • Internal light • External Dimensions: 400 W 400 D 330 H • On Site Warranty

• 360° visibility • Toughened glass panels and doors • 30°C • External Dimensions: 490 W 580 D 635 H • Parts Only

PC20

FDWDE-1X

• 4 shelf multi purpose rack • Humidified • Internal thermometer & light • External Dimensions: 492 W 530 D 730 H • On Site Warranty

KMER

The PC20 countertop food warmer has a capacity of up to 20 pies and is capable of keeping a variety of other foods warm. With a powerful 400W element, pies and pastries can easily be kept at their desired temperature, between 30-85°C. An internal water reservoir reduces the risk of drying out and removable crumb trays and safety glass keep things easy to clean, with interior lighting making this a perfect option for front of house. • Minimum 20 pie capacity • Hinged door • External Dimensions: 405 W 410 D 420 H

94

• 3 adjustable wire shelves • Safety glass • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 85 potato holding capacity • Front and back doors • Toughened glass • External Dimensions: 515 W 533 D 640 H • Parts Only


LPW

LPW/LR

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Food Warmers

• 3 chrome plated rod shelves • Thermostatic control up to 95°C • Minimum food holding temperature of 72°C • External Dimensions: 710 W 330 D 520 H • On Site Warranty

Part of the Seal display range, the LPW/LR includes internal lighting and a humidity feature to keep food in perfect condition, for longer. Stylish, rounded and compact design allows for attractive display - front or back of house - where space is at a premium. Thermostatic controls provide a maximum temperature of 95°C, whilst a minimum temperature of 72°C meets all required guidelines.

• 3 shelves • Piezo ignition • Sliding doors to rear • External Dimensions: 735 W 375 D 630 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 chrome plated rod shelves • Humidity feature • External Dimensions: 710 W 330 D 520 H

CPC

PC60

CPC1

• 3 removable wire shelves • Up to 20 pies/shelf • Water reservoir prevents food from drying out • External Dimensions: 740 W 360 D 420 H • On Site Warranty

• Minimum 60 pie capacity • 3 adjustable wire shelves • Sliding doors • External Dimensions: 740 W 410 D 420 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 4 removable wire shelves • Up to 20 pies/shelf • Water reservoir prevents food from drying out • External Dimensions: 740 W 360 D 530 H • On Site Warranty

PC140

PC140G

PC140GB

• 140 pie capacity (approx) • Double skinned back • Glass front doors • External Dimensions: 1130 W 470 D 895 H • On Site Warranty

• 140 pie capacity (approx) • Glass doors to front and rear • Variable temperature • External Dimensions: 1130 W 470 D 895 H • On Site Warranty

• 140 pie capacity (approx) • Glass doors to front and rear • Illuminated graphics panel for branding • External Dimensions: 1130 W 470 D 895 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 25W lights • Thermostatic control up to 95°C • On Site Warranty

Food Service Equipment

AGPC1

95


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Pizza Display & Lamp Units UM50

HDU20ZG

LD2

• 3 shelves • Rotating rack • 3 x shelves, 374mm diameter • External Dimensions: 565 W 565 D 780 H • On Site Warranty

• 300W quartz lamps • Heated glass base • Independent controls to base and gantry • External Dimensions: 780 W 580 D 520 H • On Site Warranty

• Halogen gantry • Glass sneeze screen • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 790 W 538 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

SRBW-1

QLD2

• Adjustable halogen gantry • 38-116°C temp range • 64mm high 1/1 GN food pan • External Dimensions: 832 W 660 D 606 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 300W heat lamps • Quartz bulbs • 400W base element • External Dimensions: 1135 W 535 D 575 H • On Site Warranty

Food Service Equipment

Looking for more display options?

See pages 100-107... UMO50

LD3

• Halogen gantry • Glass sneeze screen • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 1130 W 538 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

C3LU

This innovative product combines oven and merchandiser in one unit perfect where space is at a premium. The thermostatically controlled 50-250°C fully insulated oven can cook a 12” pizza, whilst a further 3 can be held in the lit, humidified merchandiser, which includes 3x rotating chrome shelves. Diffused twin lights create even, attractive illumination and this unit is perfect for back service areas that can be seen by the public.

• 3 shelves • 374mm diameter per shelf • External Dimensions: 565 W 565 D 925 H

96

• Rotating rack • 50-250°C built in oven with 380 x 390mm shelf • On Site Warranty

• 3 x 250W heat lamps • Infrared bulbs • 400W base element • External Dimensions: 1095 W 475 D 725 H • On Site Warranty


Want to make your own gantry?

C4LU

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Lamp Units, Gantries, Carveries & Food Carts

See page 46 Contact salesfor lamp options...

This best selling range of servery lamp units is available in 2, 3 or 4 lamp options, all with infra red bulbs. The 4 lamp C4LU operates from a total loading of just 1.8kW, meaning you can simply Plug & Go!

• Halogen gantry • Glass sneeze screen • Thermostatic control • External Dimensions: 1470 W 538 D 562 H • On Site Warranty

• 4 x 250W heat lamps • 800W base element • External Dimensions: 1425 W 475 D 725 H

BTC4

CCBM

CCSU2

• 400 x 400mm carvery pad • Quartz heated gantry • Variable heat control to base • External Dimensions: 400 W 400 D 115 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 x 250W heat lamp • Simmerstat control • 1 x 2/3 gastronorm size carvery plate • External Dimensions: 660 W 355 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 250W heat lamps • Simmerstat control • 2 x 2/3 gastronorm size carvery plate • External Dimensions: 970 W 441 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

VT1

AMTT

SCART

• Ambient temperature • Flexible foodservice trolley solution • Can be personalised with bespoke graphics • External Dimensions: 1480 W 680 D 840 H • Parts Only

• Ambient unit • Can be used with chilled eutectic plates • Available in 4 colours or stainless steel • External Dimensions: 1100 W 400 D 300 H • On Site Warranty

• Ambient unit • Can be used with chilled eutectic plates • c/w canopy, tray slide & castors • External Dimensions: 1710 W 1105 D 1655 H • On Site Warranty

• Infrared bulbs • Keeps food at ready to serve temperatures • On Site Warranty

Food Service Equipment

LD4

97


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

New Covent Garden Soup Server 98

New Covent Garden Soup Server

Soup up your menu The New Covent Garden Soup Server is a World first offering delicious, nutritious, 100% natural soup at a single touch


The range of five New Covent Garden Soup co recipes have been developed using a unique cold blend process that delivers fresh tasting soup with a long shelf life, free from artificial ingredients, flavours or preservatives. ROAST RED PEPPER AND TOMATO

Smokey roasted red pepper combined with crushed tomato and a touch of balsamic vinegar and sweet basil.

Introducing the New Covent Garden Soup Server The world’s first user friendly, high-tech soup dispenser brings fresh tasting soups to even more consumers in a ground breaking, innovative and exclusive format. • Award winning design “Red dot design Award” • Patented software driven dispensing technology • Fully HACCP conformed ensuring food safety through an innovative closed system • Fully IT-driven and remotely monitored and controlled through a dedicated internet connection The soup server developed and manufactured by The Vendinova Group is the world’s first fresh soup server guaranteed to deliver fresh tasting soup at any location and at any time! The system has already proved a success in Europe and by partnering with New Covent Garden Soup we aim to bring this success to the UK. • Easy-to-use through state of the art touch screen technology • Access through QR code system unique to each soup variety, nutritional content, allergens and portion size

• Short warm up cycle and automated temperature control • Ability to change portion size and price at a touch of a button • High dispensing speed of 50ml per second • Machine can be topped up at anytime • System can be controlled remotely or on your premises • Easy to clean and maintain • Self clean function and reporting system fully HACCP compliant • Check and balance system to prevent mishandling • Lid opens only for compliant soup QR code • Small footprint large output – plug and play operates from a single supply • Consumable parts can be fitted easily in house • Dedicated support, installation and maintenance team on call 24/7

SWEETCORN, POTATO AND LEEK

A hearty combination of buttery potatoes, fragrant leeks and sweet corn with a splash of double cream and spring onion.

SPICED BUTTERNUT AND CHICK PEA

A silky combination flavoured with Indian spices, coriander leaf and ginger.

SMOKEY ROOT VEGETABLE AND BEAN

Chunky root vegetables combined with borlotti & cannellini beans flavoured with sweet smoked paprika, rosemary and tomato.

TOMATO, MASCARPONE AND ROSEMARY

A smooth sweet mellow combination blends tomatoes with creamy mascarpone and fragrant rosemary.

R H Hall are the Exclusive UK Distributor for the New Covent Garden Soup Server

New Covent Garden Soup Server

THE MENU

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

New Covent Garden Soup Server

99


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Display

Buying Guide

Design and display is an integral part of many a modern catering operation. Positive visual impact through effective food and drink presentation will entice customers and boost sales. There are a variety of solutions that can be deployed and choosing the right display equipment is down to the menu, method of service, budget and space. There are three main functions – chilled, heated and ambient and then various solutions: from larger open front multi-decks; slimline units; glass fronted uprights; freestanding serve over counters with additions such as bain maries and food wells, to smaller countertop heated displays. Style is obviously important, but there needs to be a balance of design and practicality - it’s no good to simply look good, a unit has to have reliable performance and conform to the legislation relevant for holding and displaying food – hot or cold. Consider whether the inclusion of food and drink display cabinets will be of real benefit to service – especially in terms of throughput and mealtime turnaround. Consider the foods/menu items suitable for display and think about future needs too as well as present and how these options will fit in with any existing servery/counters. Standard units and ranges are available through RH Hall and can be used stand alone, but custom fabricated options are possible too via our own fabrications division - bespoke and tailored shop fitted solutions for any foodservice brand, concept, menu or operational need.

Advantages • Products sell easier if they are displayed attractively and effectively. • A good counter or display can ensure foods are kept at their optimum serving conditions, keeping them looking at their best – either at specific serving times (e.g. lunchtime) or throughout the day, hour after hour. • Good internal lighting will help to catch customers’ eyes and enhance the food display. • Glass display cabinets allow adults and children to get closer to the foods without the risk of contamination from touching fingers or coughs and sneezes! • Movable display units can help utilise and maximise space outside service times or for peaks in service.

Buying Tips By choosing the right model you can expect it to last between 3-5 years even in the busiest environments. • Capacity – Size is important. Choose a unit that is too small and it won’t have the capacity during busy periods and if too large, it will take up space and energy. Consider capacity for future needs. • Build quality and reliability – Choose a leading brand with an established reputation for good quality and reliability – high performance insulation is key. Ensure compliance with all the relevant food safety regulations and be sure of spare part availability and an efficient after sales service. Regular cleaning and 6 monthly servicing will keep units in peak condition with optimum efficiency. • Operational features – Features play a key role in units performing at their optimum to help comply with the food safety guidelines – look for easy to clean exteriors and interiors, visible temperature display for HACCP monitoring, rapid cooling and self-closing doors to ensure optimum performance levels and forced air control systems to ensure uniformed temperatures and condensation prevention otherwise this will ruin visibility and deter choice. In heated units, good heat distribution and a humidifying feature to prevent foods drying out. Look for energy saving LED lighting that won’t overheat the foods in refrigerated displays.

100

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


GC46D

D6R/75B

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ambient & Refrigerated Countertop Display Cabinets

• Ambient • Manufactured from toughened glass • 3x6mm thick removable shelves + 10mm base • External Dimensions: 600 W 350 D 645 H • On Site Warranty

VACT2

• Ambient • Ideal for confectionary, crisps, fruit etc. • 2 shelves + base • External Dimensions: 825 W 660 D 627 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 750 W 650 D 965 H

VOACT3

VOCCT2

VCCT2

• Ambient • Ideal for confectionary, crisps, fruit etc. • 2 shelves + base • External Dimensions: 1175 W 660 D 627 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • Digital electronic temperature control • External Dimensions: 825 W 740 D 627 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • Digital electronic temperature control • External Dimensions: 825 W 740 D 627 H • On Site Warranty

D3R/100

D5R/100B

D6R/100B

• Refrigerated • Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1000 W 350 D 575 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1000 W 500 D 575 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1000 W 650 D 965 H • On Site Warranty

• Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • 2 adjustable shelves + base • On Site Warranty

Display

From rectangular or curved front Merchandisers, to Food Display Bars there’s a Seal product to suit every need. There’s a choice too of self-service or back-service models and all have illuminated interiors to enhance the display of food. The D6R/75B is simple and stylish, suitable for back service applications. Even, daylight balanced illumination enhances the appearance of any menu item.

101


Display

For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Countertop & Freestanding Refrigerated & Heated Display Cabinets C6R/100BU

FDB5

C6R/130BR

• Refrigerated • Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1000 W 650 D 755 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Precise thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Holds 5 x 100mm deep 1/3 GN (not included) • External Dimensions: 1222 W 375 D 245 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Thermostat holds food at +3 to +7°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1300 W 650 D 755 H • On Site Warranty

PCT-1345

PCT-1795

VHCT2

• Refrigerated • Countertop • +2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1345 W 336 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Countertop • +2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1795 W 336 D 450 H • On Site Warranty

• Heated • Ideal for hot rolls, pies, pasties etc • 2 shelves + base • External Dimensions: 825 W 660 D 627 H • On Site Warranty

RMH100SP

C6H/100B

• Heated • Thermostat holds food at min 72°C • Illuminated • External Dimensions: 1000 W 650 D 755 • On Site Warranty

SCH1085

Victor Optimax Display Cabinets are available in hot, ambient and chilled versions suitable for either assisted or self-service applications. They are perfectly suited for delis, coffee shops, convenience stores and all food-togo outlets. The heated RMH100SP has an open front for easy customer self service, with an adjustable, independent shelf temperature of 65-95°C

• Heated • 2 adjustable shelves + base • External Dimensions: 1000 W 750 D 1445 H

102

• Self service with open back for pass-through • Illumination to each level • On Site Warranty

• Heated • Thermostat holds food at min 72°C • 20°C ambient • External Dimensions: 1085 W 750 D 665 H • On Site Warranty


RMH65SW

VA900

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Heated & Ambient Freestanding Display Cabinets

• Heated • Self service with solid back • Controls to front • External Dimensions: 650 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

VOH900-GO

• Heated • Product temperature maintained at 65-72°C • 20°C ambient • External Dimensions: 900 W 749 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• Ambient • 3 glass shelves • External Dimensions: 900 W 749 D 1460 H

VOH1200-GO

RMH130S

RMA65SP

• Heated • Product temperature maintained at 65-72°C • 20°C ambient • External Dimensions: 1200 W 749 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• Heated • Self service with solid back • Controls to rear • External Dimensions: 1300 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

• Ambient • Self service with open back for pass-through • 3 adjustable, removable glass shelves + base • External Dimensions: 650 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

RMA100E

VOA1200

RMA130SP

• Ambient • For assisted service • Open to rear • External Dimensions: 1000 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

• Ambient • Ideal for confectionary, crisps, fruit etc. • 3 glass shelves • External Dimensions: 1200 W 749 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• Ambient • Self service with open back for pass-through • 3 adjustable, removable glass shelves + base • External Dimensions: 1300 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

• Ideal for confectionary, crisps, fruit etc. • Illumination to all levels • On Site Warranty

Display

The VA900 is part of the Counterline Vision range and combines stylish design with simple functionality. Ambient temperature makes this unit ideal for confectionary, crisps or fruit, with an open rear creating an easy serving environment. All 3 shelves are illuminated as standard, creating an enticing product display.

103


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Display

Refrigerated Freestanding Display Cabinets VOC600-GO

VC600-GO

FDC600C

• Refrigerated • Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • Open front for self service • External Dimensions: 600 W 749 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • Enclosed front with rear doors • External Dimensions: 600 W 749 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Closed front for assisted service • +1 to +4°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 600 W 785 D 1435 H • On Site Warranty

FDC900

RMR100E

RMR100S

• Refrigerated • Closed front for assisted service • +1 to +4°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 900 W 785 D 1435 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • For assisted service • Drop down rear doors • External Dimensions: 1000 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Self service with solid back • Controls to rear • External Dimensions: 1000 W 750 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty

VC1200-GO

SC1200

• Refrigerated • Open front for self serve • 3 adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 1200 W 780 D 1500 H • On Site Warranty

RMR130SW

The VC1200-GO is part of the Counterline Vision range, offering fully enclosed chilled free-standing food display for assisted service. Ideal for sandwiches, filled rolls, dairy products, drinks and more, all 3 shelves are illuminated to maximise the menu options on display.

• Refrigerated • Digital electronic temperature control • Illumination to all levels • Integral fan blown refrigeration system • External Dimensions: 1200 W 749 D 1460 H

104

• Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • 3 glass shelves • Open front for self service • Castors as standard • On Site Warranty

• Refrigerated • Self service with solid back • Controls to front • External Dimensions: 1300 W 900 D 1445 H • On Site Warranty


EVO120SS

PC900

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Serveovers & Patisserie Cabinets

• 0 to +2°C temperature range • 3 refrigerated glass shelves • Sliding rear door • External Dimensions: 1200 W 785 D 1400 H • On Site Warranty

Specifically designed to chill and hold goods like cakes, croissants, pies and open sandwiches in peak condition, the Williams PC900 creates an attractive product display with no compromise in performance. Constructed with mirrored stainless steel and tempered glass, the interior space is illuminated with LEDs while glass shelves enhance visibility and create an attractive refrigerated display. Rear loading doors allow for easy access for restocking and serving, while the curved glass front is hinged providing easy access for cleaning.

• 0 to +2°C temperature range • 3 refrigerated glass shelves • Sliding rear door • External Dimensions: 1800 W 785 D 1400 H • On Site Warranty

• +5 to +8C temperature range • LED strip lighting • External Dimensions: 900 W 780 D 1500 H

SALINA80/100

SOC-1055

SALINA80/150

• Flat or curved glass • +3 to +5°C temperature range • Refrigerated under storage • External Dimensions: 1040 W 900 D 1292 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat glass • 0 to +8°C temperature range • 150 litre under storage area • External Dimensions: 1055 W 800 D 1235 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat or curved glass • +3 to +5°C temperature range • Refrigerated under storage • External Dimensions: 1520 W 900 D 1292 H • On Site Warranty

SOC-1525

SALINA80/200

• Flat glass • 0 to +8°C temperature range • 225 litre under storage area • External Dimensions: 1525 W 800 D 1235 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat or curved glass • +3 to +5°C temperature range • Refrigerated under storage • External Dimensions: 2000 W 900 D 1292 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 adjustable shelves • Rear loading doors with hinged glass front • On Site Warranty

Display

EVO180

Need a Bottle Cooler?

See our Bar Equipment range on pages 125-127...

105


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Display

Serveovers & Multidecks SOC-2025

SALINA80/250

SALINA80/300

• Flat glass • 0 to +8°C temperature range • 300 litre under storage area • External Dimensions: 2025 W 800 D 1235 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat or curved glass • +3 to +5°C temperature range • Refrigerated under storage • External Dimensions: 2480 W 900 D 1292 H • On Site Warranty

• Flat or curved glass • +3 to +5°C temperature range • Refrigerated under storage • External Dimensions: 2960 W 900 D 1292 H • On Site Warranty

EC900

FMSLIM900NG

R100SCN

• Display temperature 3-5°C in 25°C ambient • Digital electronic temperature control • 3 glass shelves + base • External Dimensions: 943 W 781 D 1918 H • On Site Warranty

• +2 to +4°C temperature range • Soft close night blind • Glass ends • External Dimensions: 895 W 680 D 1780 H • On Site Warranty

• +3 to +5°C temperature range • 25°C ambient • 3 adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 960 W 670 D 1860 H • On Site Warranty

VULCANO80/100

Looking for Glass Door Merchandisers?

Visit our Refrigeration section... Pages 123-124 EVO-SELF120 BLK

The Sterling Vulcano range of refrigerated Multidecks all feature electronic controls with auto defrost and night blinds supplied as standard. 4 x white painted steel shelves offer a large display capacity and horizontal neon strip lighting ensures all products stand out. Ticket rails and glass sides make things easy for the customer and low energy consumption ensures on-going running costs are kept to a minimum.

• +3 to +5°C temperature range • White & grey finish • External Dimensions: 1080 W 810 D 2040 H

106

• 4 x shelves + base • Solid ends • On Site Warranty

• 0-2°C temperature range • 3 x stainless steel shelves + base • Black finish • External Dimensions: 1200 W 780 D 1510 H • On Site Warranty


R125SCS

ECHF600

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Multidecks - Refrigerated & Heated

• +3 to +5°C temperature range • 25°C ambient • 3 adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 1250 W 670 D 1860 H • On Site Warranty

R150SCS

• +3 to +5°C temperature range • 25°C ambient • 3 adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 1510 W 670 D 1860 H • On Site Warranty

• Unique chilled and heated unit • 2 to 4°C chilled zone • External Dimensions: 628 W 781 D 1918 H

FMPRO1500RF

EVO-SELF180 SS

VULCANO80/187

• +2 to +4°C temperature range • Lockable roller shutter • Solid ends • External Dimensions: 1495 W 775 D 1995 H • On Site Warranty

• 0 to +2°C temperature range • 3 x stainless steel shelves + base • Stainless finish • External Dimensions: 1800 W 780 D 1510 H • On Site Warranty

• +3 to +5°C temperature range • 4 x shelves + base • White & grey finish • External Dimensions: 1955 W 810 D 2040 H • On Site Warranty

EH600

EH900

EH1200

• Heated • Product temperature maintained at 65-72°C • 25°C ambient • External Dimensions: 628 W 655 D 1918 H • On Site Warranty

• Heated • Product temperature maintained at 65-72° • 25°C ambient • External Dimensions: 920 W 655 D 1918 H • On Site Warranty

• Heated • Product temperature maintained at 65-72°C • 25°C ambient • External Dimensions: 1220 W 655 D 1918 H • On Site Warranty

• 65 to 90°C heated zone • LED lighting • On Site Warranty

Display

This unique Display Cabinet offers fan assisted heated and chilled self service. Perfect for operators looking to maximise their food offering in a compact footprint, the heated levels are perfect for cooked pastries, chicken portions or hot rolls and paninis, whilst the chilled levels provide storage for cold sandwiches, drinks and other grab & go options.

107


Refrigeration

For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Buying Guide

Refrigeration is essential in today’s busy kitchens, it needs to be relied upon 24/7 and is vital for food safety. This equipment has evolved considerably over the last few years in terms of energy efficiency and this is a key factor when choosing the right units, especially in light of green issues and ever-rising utility bills. New legislation came into effect from July 2016, meaning all commercial refrigerators and freezers sold within the EU must pass Minimum Energy Performance Standards (MEPS), achieving at least a ‘G’ rating. Our Sales Team can advise on the energy ratings of all our products. Optimum performance is guaranteed with the revolutionary new model ranges which feature thick CFC insulation, natural refrigerants and innovative technology, all equating to long term cost savings, sustainability, efficiency and unit longevity. Most leading brands have commercial cabinets available in a range of models, including walk-in coldrooms, uprights, counters and pass through – and with programmed temperatures and humidity settings for specific commodities e.g. fresh meat, wet fish, vegetables, chilled food, wine, beer and frozen food. And this is where the mix of fresh, chilled and frozen food served and the required application of refrigeration needs to be identified – will it be used in the kitchen area, counter display, the bar, or for communal area vending? To aid selection, thorough planning is vital if space is to be capitalised on – combinations of upright and undercounter units sited correctly will aid work flow and help an operation perform at maximum efficiency, whether in the kitchens or front of house.

Advantages

• Energy efficient commercial models maximise performance and help reduce costs. Many units now have intelligent controllers which save energy, only running the refrigeration system when required. • Walk-in coldrooms and freezer rooms can be sited remotely out of the kitchen area for larger volumes or to help with peaks in demand. • Smaller reach-in and step-in models can maximise storage where space is at a premium. • Undercounter models offer versatility in any size kitchen. Reducing transit times between prep area and refrigerator and if fitted with drawers, reduce the risk of cross-contamination and save even more energy. • For front of house, creative and dramatic displays are now possible with stylish refrigerated merchandising/counter units – creating that all important first impression.

Buying Tips By choosing the right model and maintaining it, you can expect it to last between 5-8 years, even in the busiest environments.

108

• Capacity – The size, internal capacity, type and model required will depend upon the operation and throughput, plus the application it’s for. Be mindful of any future plans to expand operations. • Build quality and reliability – Choose a leading commercial brand with an established reputation for good quality and reliability. Look for a high grade stainless steel finish and high density insulation. Don’t go domestic - they can’t maintain the correct temperatures and warranties won’t cover commercial use. A full manufacturer’s warranty (1-5 years), spare parts availability and good after sales service, including a maintenance contract, are advised. • Operational features – Look at life cycle costs and bear in mind the C0² emissions – the lower the carbon footprint the more efficient and environmentally friendly – ask which refrigerant is in the unit – R600a is the most efficient. Also look for: visible temperature displays; rapid cooling; self-closing doors; door alarms; internal lighting; adjustable and removable shelving; coved internal corners, removable door gaskets; forced/blown air to ensure uniformed temperatures; easy access to condenser for repairs; castors for moving units to allow ease of cleaning and possible re-location. Our team can advise on the savings available through manufacturers registered with the ECA (Enhanced Capital Allowance) Scheme which provides tax relief for businesses that invest in energy efficient equipment and with The Carbon Trust where there is an Energy Technology List which details products that offer better energy efficiency and reduced running costs.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


BRS50W

K210RG

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Tabletop, Undercounter & Upright Fridges

• 46 litre capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • -18°C 4 litre ice box compartment • External Dimensions: 472 W 450 D 492 H • On Site Warranty

Part of the bestselling Gram Compact range, 210 models are designed to fit under worktops in commercial workplaces. The K210RG offers a Stainless Steel finish, but is also available in white or glass door options. Upright and freezer options complete this range of refrigeration essentials.

• 7 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H • On Site Warranty

• 4.4 cu ft capacity • 3 grey shelves included • Fan assisted • HFC Free • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 830 H

727048

K210LG

BRS200ST

• 160 litre capacity • +2 to +10°C temperature range • 3 grids included • External Dimensions: 600 W 637 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 4.4 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 3 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless steel • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H • On Site Warranty

CRS200ST

HR150

K310LG

• 7 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless effect finish • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H • On Site Warranty

• 153 litre capacity • +3 to +5°C temperature range • 2 nylon coated shelves • External Dimensions: 605 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 7.8 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1325 H • On Site Warranty

• +2 to +12°C temperature range • Digital temperature display • ABS interior • RH hinged reversible door with lock • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

BRS200W

109


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Upright Fridges BRS400W

CRS400W

BRS400ST

• 14 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 14 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 14 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless steel • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

ECO MIDI K60LAG

CRS400ST

K410RG

• 407 litre capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 771 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 14 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless effect finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 6 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H • On Site Warranty

ECO MIDI K60RAG

K410LG

• 407 litre capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 771 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

ECO MIDI M60CCG

The K410LG is one of the most popular models in the Compact range. Setting new standards for refrigeration, all models are HFC free, offering ultra low energy consumption. Not only does this mean a low cost of ownership for the user, but also helps to reduce their carbon footprint.

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • 6 white shelves included • ABS interior • RH hinged reversible door with lock • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H

110

• +2 to +12°C temperature range • Digital temperature display • HFC Free • Castors • On Site Warranty

• 407 litre capacity • -5 to +12°C temperature range • 4 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 771 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty


ECO EURO K60RAG

T19E

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Upright Fridges

• 465 litre capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 855 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

Designed with endurance in mind, using the highest quality materials and components, the T19E is backed up by True’s comprehensive 5 Year Warranty. One of our bestselling products, contact our Sales Team for the latest pricing.

• 21 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 775 W 743 D 1982 H • On Site Warranty

• 19 cu ft capacity • White interior • Interior lighting • Lock • External Dimensions: 686 W 623 D 2003 H

CRS600ST

K610

K605

• 21 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless effect finish • External Dimensions: 775 W 743 D 1982 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • Digital display • External Dimensions: 695 W 868 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C temperature range • 3 grey shelves • External Dimensions: 695 W 855 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

HJ1

EP700H

ECO MIDI K82RAG

• 21 cu ft capacity • +1 to +4°C temperature range • 3 shelves • External Dimensions: 737 W 824 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • +1 to +4°C temperature range • 3x GN2/1 shelves • External Dimensions: 700 W 820 D 2080 H • On Site Warranty

• 603 litre capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 820 W 771 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • 4 adjustable shelves • Castors • Self closing door • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

BRS600W

111


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Upright Fridges ECO PLUS K70CCG

ECO TWIN K82RAG

SUP PLUS K72RAG

• 21 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 700 W 905 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 820 W 785 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 720 W 905 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

CLGN700ST

727369

T23

• 24 cu ft capacity • -2 to +8°C temperature range • Self closing door with lock • External Dimensions: 740 W 830 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

• 23 cu ft capacity • 0 to +6°C temperature range • 3 x 2/1 GN grids included • External Dimensions: 710 W 837 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

• 23 cu ft capacity • +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • White interior • External Dimensions: 686 W 750 D 2071 H • On Site Warranty

HJ2

TS23

• 23 cu ft capacity • +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • Stainless steel interior • External Dimensions: 686 W 750 D 2071 H • On Site Warranty

CLGN1400ST

Recently redesigned, the Jade range is built for effective operation in 43°C high ambient environments. Robust and energy conscious, Jade has successfully proven itself to withstand the rigours of day to day operation in the most stressful of kitchens. The HJ2 offers large capacity double door chilled storage.

• 45 cu ft capacity • 6 shelves • External Dimensions: 1400 W 824 D 1960 H

112

• +1 to +4°C temperature range • Castors • On Site Warranty

• 49 cu ft capacity • -2 to +8°C temperature range • Self closing door with lock • External Dimensions: 1480 W 830 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty


K1305

BFS200W

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Upright Fridges, Tabletop & Undercounter Freezers

• 43 cu ft capacity • Double door • +2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1390 W 855 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

The range of EssenChill refrigeration is perfect for a wide range of catering establishments - whether a restaurant with a busy kitchen, or a small specialist café. The BFS200W is the range’s entry level freezer and has been designed to bring you quality and affordability in one.

• 44.8 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 8 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 1390 W 876 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 cu ft capacity • White finish • 2 fixed wire shelves • Reversible door • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H

• -18 to -25°C temperature range • Lock • Manual defrost • 2 adjustable feet with rollers to rear • On Site Warranty

T49

727375

MJ2

• 49 cu ft capacity • +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • White interior • External Dimensions: 1372 W 750 D 2071 H • On Site Warranty

• 50 cu ft capacity • 0 to +6°C temperature range • 6 x 2/1 GN grids included • External Dimensions: 1441 W 837 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

• 45 cu ft capacity • For storage of fresh meat • -2 to +2°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1400 W 824 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

M1400CXH

BFS50W

F210LG

• 49.4 cu ft capacity • -5 to +12°C temperature range • 10 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 1390 W 876 D 2150 H • On Site Warranty

• 32 litre capacity • -18°C temperature • White finish • External Dimensions: 472 W 450 D 492 H • On Site Warranty

• 4.4 cu ft capacity • -5 to -22°C temperature range • 3 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

K1270RSH

113


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Undercounter & Upright Freezers 727066

BFS200ST

CFS200ST

• 160 litre capacity • -15 to -20°C temperature range • 3 grids included • External Dimensions: 600 W 637 D 825 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • Stainless steel • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • Stainless effect finish • External Dimensions: 595 W 667 D 838 H • On Site Warranty

F210RG

LR150

F310RG

• 4.4 cu ft capacity • -5 to -22°C temperature range • 3 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 153 litre capacity • -18 to -21°C capacity • 2 shelves included • External Dimensions: 605 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 7.8 cu ft capacity • -5 to -22°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1325 H • On Site Warranty

ECO MIDI F60RAG

BFS400W

• 14 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

CFS400W

The ECO MIDI F60RAG ranks in energy class C according to new EU legislation introduced in July 2016. Combining stylish design with high functionality and low energy consumption, this model joins a wide range of MIDI cabinets offering a solution for any foodservice establishment.

• 407 litre capacity • 4 grey shelves included • LED lighting • Stainless & aluminium interior • External Dimensions: 600 W 771 D 2000 H

114

• -5 to -25°C temperature range • Suitable for 1/1 GN • Silver exterior • RH hinged reversible self closing door • On Site Warranty

• 14 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty


F410LG

727372

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Upright Freezers

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • -5 to -22°C temperature range • 6 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H • On Site Warranty

This 670 litre upright freezer has a digital control panel, allowing easy and precise temperature setting. High ambient temperature operation reduces the potential for issues in busy, hot catering environments.

• 14 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • Stainless steel • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 23 cu ft capacity • 3 x 2/1 GN grids included • Automatic defrost • Castors • On Site Warranty

CFS400ST

F410RG

CFS600W

• 14 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • Stainless effect finish • External Dimensions: 603 W 653 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • -5 to -22°C temperature range • 6 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • White finish • External Dimensions: 775 W 743 D 1982 H • On Site Warranty

ECO MIDI F82LAG

BFS600ST

ECO EURO F60RAG

• 603 litre capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 820 W 771 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • -18 to -25°C temperature range • Stainless steel • External Dimensions: 775 W 743 D 1982 H • On Site Warranty

• 465 litre capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 4 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 771 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

• -15 to -22°C temperature range • Digital control panel • Lockable RH hinged door • External Dimensions: 710 W 837 D 2010 H

Refrigeration

BRS400ST

115


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Upright Freezers SUP EURO F62RAG

T19FZ

F610

• 16 cu ft capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 4 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 620 W 855 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

• 19 cu ft capacity • Maintains -18°C average • White interior • External Dimensions: 686 W 623 D 2065 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 cu ft capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • Digital display • External Dimensions: 695 W 868 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

F605

ECO PLUS F70RAG

LJ1

• 21 cu ft capacity • -10 to -22°C temperature range • 3 grey shelves • External Dimensions: 695 W 855 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 700 W 905 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

• 21 cu ft capacity • -18 to -22°C temperature range • 3 shelves • External Dimensions: 737 W 824 D 1960 H • On Site Warranty

T23F

SUP PLUS F72CCG

• 21 cu ft capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 4 stainless shelves included • External Dimensions: 720 W 905 D 2100 H • On Site Warranty

T35FZ

Ideally suited for both frozen foods and ice cream, with a temperature maintained at -23.3°C. The T23F is designed using the highest quality materials and components to provide the user with colder product temperatures, lower utility costs, exceptional food safety and the best value in today’s food service marketplace.

• 23 cu ft capacity • White interior • External Dimensions: 686 W 750 D 2074 H

116

• Holds -23.3°C • 4 adjustable shelves • On Site Warranty

• 35 cu ft capacity • Maintains -18°C average • White interior • External Dimensions: 1004 W 750 D 2071 H • On Site Warranty


Upright Freezers & Counter Fridges F1305

CUGN1400ST

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

• 43 cu ft capacity • Double door • -10 to -22°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1390 W 855 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

Designed with large volumes in mind, this Double Door Catering Freezer offers a huge 1400 litre capacity. An ambient temperature of 40°C allows it to withstand the heat of any commercial kitchen and a temperature range of -18 to -25°C conforms to all food hygiene standards.

• 44.8 cu ft capacity • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 8 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 1390 W 876 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 49 cu ft capacity • Self closing doors with lock • 2/1 GN compatible • Digital display • External Dimensions: 1480 W 830 D 2010 H

727378

EP1440L

T49FZ

• 50 cu ft capacity • -15 to -22°C temperature range • 6 x 2/1 GN grids included • External Dimensions: 1441 W 837 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

• 47 cu ft capacity • -18 to -21°C temperature range • 6x GN2/1 shelves • External Dimensions: 1440 W 820 D 2080 H • On Site Warranty

• 49 cu ft capacity • Maintains -18°C average • White interior • External Dimensions: 1375 W 750 D 2074 H • On Site Warranty

HJSC2

K1205

EP1/2H

• 2 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • 2 shelves per door • External Dimensions: 1345 W 500 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • -2 to +8°C temperature range • 8 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 1182 W 700 D 835-900 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • Digital display • External Dimensions: 1415 W 700 D 865 H • On Site Warranty

• -18 to -25°C temperature range • 8 shelves • Internal light • Castors (2 lockable) • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

F1270RSH

117


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Counter Fridges MJC2

TGU-2

726553

• 2 doors • For storage of fresh meat • -2 to +2°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1420 W 659 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • LED display • External Dimensions: 1420 W 712 D 864 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • -2 to +10°C temperature range • 1 x 1/1 GN grid per door • External Dimensions: 1274 W 700 D 950 H • On Site Warranty

RC3DR

K1605

K1807CSH

• 3 doors • -2 to +8°C temperature range • 436 litre capacity • External Dimensions: 1795 W 700 D 965 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • -2 to +8°C temperature range • 12 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 1633 W 700 D 835-900 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 18 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 1726 W 700 D 905 H • On Site Warranty

TGU-3

HJC3

• 3 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • 2 shelves per door • External Dimensions: 1885 W 659 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

EP1/4H

With 3 doors and an overall capacity of over 15 cu ft, this 1/1 GN compatible counter fridge offers the usual True quality - backed up by their comprehensive 5 year warranty.

• 3 doors • LED display • 3 x GN 1/1 rails per door • Front ventilation • On Site Warranty

118

• +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • 15.8 cu ft capacity • Tropical compressor • External Dimensions: 1880 W 712 D 864 H

• 4 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • Digital display • External Dimensions: 2320 W 700 D 865 H • On Site Warranty


RC4DR

K1807CSH SL

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Counter Fridges, Saladette & Pizza Prep Counters

• 4 doors • -2 to +8°C temperature range • 592 litre capacity • External Dimensions: 2245 W 700 D 965 H • On Site Warranty

The versatile Gram Gastro range of counters offers many configurations of doors and drawers to create your perfect kitchen solution. The K1807CSHSL has 3 doors and a Saladette top to accept up to 2x 1/1 and 1x 1/3 GN containers.

• 4 doors • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 23.7 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 2163 W 700 D 905 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • +2 to +12°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1726 W 700 D 905 H

TSSU27-8

FPS2HR

TSSU48-12

• 1 door • Saladette top • +0.5 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 702 W 766 D 1093 H • On Site Warranty

• Saladette top • 2 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1138 W 850 D 1059 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • Saladette top • +0.5 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1229 W 766 D 1093 H • On Site Warranty

SALADCTR3DR

FPS5HR

PC2DR

• Saladette top • 3 doors • 0 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 2020 W 600 D 1360 H • On Site Warranty

• Saladette top • 5 doors • +1 to +4°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 2884 W 850 D 1059 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • 5 x 1/4 GN topping unit • Granite work surface • External Dimensions: 1345 W 700 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• Saladette top • 18 cu ft capacity • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

K2207CSH

119


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Pizza Prep, Dual Temp Drawers & Counter Freezers TPP67

K1807CSH PT

TPP93

• 2 doors • +0.5 to +5°C temperature range • Exterior temperature display • External Dimensions: 1709 W 896 D 1067 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 18 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 1726 W 800 D 1151 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • +0.5 to +5°C temperature range • Exterior temperature display • External Dimensions: 2369 W 896 D 1067 H • On Site Warranty

FFC2-1

FFC4-2

LJC2

• 1 x multi temperature drawer • +1 to +4°C or -18 to -21°C temperature range • Change drawer temp at the touch of a button • External Dimensions: 775 W 700 D 600 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x multi temperature drawers • +1 to +4°C or -18 to -21°C temperature range • Change drawer temp at the touch of a button • External Dimensions: 775 W 700 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 doors • -18 to -22°C temperature range • 2 shelves per door • External Dimensions: 1420 W 659 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

FC2DR

F1407CSH

• 2 doors • -5 to -25°C temperature range • 11.6 cu ft capacity • External Dimensions: 1289 W 700 D 905 H • On Site Warranty

LJSC3

The new range of Lec Counters offer caterers the perfect combination of storage space with a dedicated work area for the preparation of food. Easy to use, simple to keep clean and ideal for cafes, restaurants, bars and hotels. • 2 doors • 280 litre capacity • 1 shelf per door • Digital temperature controller • External Dimensions: 1345 W 700 D 965 H

120

• -15 to -20°C temperature range • 4 castors (2 lockable) • Self closing doors • 38°C ambient temperature • On Site Warranty

• 3 doors • -18 to -22°C temperature range • 2 shelves per door • External Dimensions: 1810 W 500 D 860 H • On Site Warranty


EP1/3L

SKF20

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Counter Freezers, Blast Chillers/Freezers & Chest Freezers

• 3 doors • -18 to -21°C temperature range • Digital display • External Dimensions: 1865 W 700 D 865 H • On Site Warranty

With a 20kg capacity, the SKF20 is capable of chilling or freezing large quantities quickly. Part of the high quality, affordable Snowflake range contact our Sales Team for the latest pricing.

• 3 doors • Holds -23.3°C • LED temperature display • External Dimensions: 1880 W 712 D 864 H • On Site Warranty

• 20kg capacity • 12kg from +70 to -18°C in 4 hours • External Dimensions: 745 W 700 D 1000 H

KPS21CH

KPS42CH

BCT15-7

• 22kg capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • 22kg +70°C to +3°C in 90 minutes • External Dimensions: 745 W 720 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 45kg capacity • 0 to +10°C temperature range • 45kg +70°C to +3°C in 90 minutes • External Dimensions: 800 W 830 D 1850 H • On Site Warranty

• 15kg chilling capacity • 7kg occasional freezing capacity • +70 to +3°C • External Dimensions: 755 W 690 D 890 H • On Site Warranty

BCT52-26

SZ181C

CH300E

• 52kg chilling capacity • 26kg occasional freezing capacity • +70 to +3°C • External Dimensions: 755 W 690 D 1790 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 cu ft capacity • -18 to -22°C temperature range • Digital temperature display • External Dimensions: 720 W 695 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 9.9 cu ft capacity • -17 to -24°C temperature range • Counterbalanced lid with assisted closure • External Dimensions: 1020 W 600 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 20kg from +70 to +3°C in 90 minutes • Digital 8 key control panel • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

TGU-3F

121


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Chest Freezers & Ice Cream Merchandisers CF295

SZ362C-STS

CF400

• 10.4 cu ft capacity • -18 to -34°C • Digital temperature display • External Dimensions: 1014 W 720 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

• 13 cu ft capacity • -18 to -22°C temperature range • Digital temperature display • External Dimensions: 1260 W 695 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 14.1 cu ft capacity • -18 to -34°C • Digital temperature display • External Dimensions: 1304 W 720 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

CF53S

CF61S

CSG22

• 18.7 cu ft capacity • -11 to -22°C temperature range • 3 wire baskets • External Dimensions: 1500 W 730 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

• 21.5 cu ft capacity • -11 to -22°C temperature range • 3 wire baskets • External Dimensions: 1700 W 730 D 860 H • On Site Warranty

• 7.7 cu ft capacity • -14 to -23°C temperature range • 5 scoop capacity • External Dimensions: 724 W 654 D 916 H • Parts Only

CH400E

IKG275

• 9 cu ft capacity • -17 to -24°C temperature range • Sliding glass lid • External Dimensions: 920 W 600 D 910 H • On Site Warranty

CSG45

Perfect for storing large quantities for long periods, the CH400E has a large 12.7 cu ft capacity. A digital display shows the internal temperature and an audible alarm sounds if the unit is left open. A fast freeze compartment is also included. • 12.7 cu ft capacity • Counterbalanced lid with assisted closure • Digital temperature display • Temperature alarm and indicator • External Dimensions: 1260 W 600 D 850 H

122

• -17 to -24°C temperature range • Fast freeze compartment • Manual defrost • 0.15kW • On Site Warranty

• 15.9 cu ft capacity • -14 to -23°C temperature range • 10 scoop capacity • External Dimensions: 1304 W 654 D 916 H • Parts Only


IKG505

S30

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ice Cream Machines & Merchandisers - Ice Cream & Glass Front

• 18 cu ft capacity • -17 to -24°C temperature range • Sliding glass lid • External Dimensions: 1560 W 600 D 910 H • On Site Warranty

This high output soft serve ice cream machine can provide up to 290 servings per hour with 2x 12 litre mix hoppers. An in-built microprocessor records the number of dispenses per day and total number of dispenses, automatically regulates refrigeration by monitoring product viscosity to maintain consistent quality and displays hopper and cylinder temperature.

• 2 litre capacity • 30/40 min preparation time • 60 minute mechanical timer • External Dimensions: 450 W 300 D 270 H • Workshop Warranty

• Soft serve - For ice cream, yoghurt or sorbet • 2 x 1.7 litre freezing cylinders • External Dimensions: 553 W 654 D 1474 H

STELLA

T15

BRG50B

• 3 litre capacity • 30/40 min preparation time • 60 min mechanical timer • External Dimensions: 510 W 350 D 310 H • Workshop Warranty

• Soft serve - For ice cream, yoghurt or sorbet • 110 approx servings per hour • 1.7 litre freezing cylinder • External Dimensions: 440 W 700 D 721 H • On Site Warranty

• 51 litre capacity • +7 to +10°C temperature range • Black finish with glass door • External Dimensions: 470 W 450 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

DR149

KG210RG

• 5.2 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C • Adjustable thermostat • External Dimensions: 595 W 655 D 840 H • On Site Warranty

• 4.4 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 3 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 290 approx servings per hour • 2 x 12 litre mix hoppers • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

MINI

Looking for more Display options?

See pages 100-107...

123


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Upright Merchandisers KG310RG

KG410LG

KG410RG

• 7.8 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 grey shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1325 H • On Site Warranty

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 6 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1875 H • On Site Warranty

• 12.3 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 6 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H • On Site Warranty

D372

ECO MIDI KG60LLG

ECO MIDI FG60LLG

• 372 litre capacity • 5 adjustable shelves • 0 to +10°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 600 W 640 D 1860 H • On Site Warranty

• 15 cu ft capacity • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 4 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 806 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

• 15 cu ft capacity • -5 to -20°C temperature range • 4 white shelves included • External Dimensions: 600 W 806 D 2000 H • On Site Warranty

GDM35

GDM19

• 19 cu ft capacity • 4 shelves • 0.5 to 3.3°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 686 W 632 D 1998 H • On Site Warranty

BBS880-HG

True are the World’s no. 1 manufacturer of Glass Door Merchandisers and their products are used globally in a variety of Foodservice applications. This large capacity, double door unit includes a top light box for branding opportunities.

• 35 cu ft capacity • 8 adjustable shelves • Top light box • External Dimensions: 1004 W 750 D 1988 H

124

• +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • White interior with light • 2 hinged self closing doors • On Site Warranty

• 814 litre capacity • 4 adjustable shelves • 0 to +10°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 880 W 860 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty


DR957

BC6007 LED

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Merchandisers, Wine Coolers & Undercounter Bottle Coolers

• 33.8 cu ft capacity • 0 to +10°C • Adjustable thermostat • External Dimensions: 990 W 825 D 2010 H • On Site Warranty

The Lec range of bottle coolers are stylish to look at, offer excellent storage volume and are amongst the cheapest on the market to run. The BC6007 is a single door unit - holding up to 106 bottles - and is available in a black or silver finish. Larger units, available with hinged or sliding doors, are also available.

• 338 litre capacity • Stores up to 86 bottles • 6 to 22°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1550 W 600 D 600 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 500 D 900 H

SCV115-1

KG410RG10WV

30ES

• 198 bottle capacity • 5 to 22°C temperature range • Anti UV glass door • External Dimensions: 600 W 620 D 185 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • +2 to +12°C temperature range • 10 white tilted shelves included • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 1900 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • Holds up to 105 bottles • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 493 W 540 D 800 H • Parts Only

APS

180ES

160ES GSS

• Single door • Holds up to 87 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +11°C • External Dimensions: 525 W 500 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • Holds up to 120 bottles • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 597 W 540 D 900 H • Parts Only

• Single door • Holds up to 120 bottles • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 597 W 540 D 800 H • Parts Only

• Holds up to 106 bottles • Auto defrost • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

FZ295W-SILVER

125


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Undercounter Bottle Coolers M60S

BC6097 LED

V60

• Single door • Holds up to 112 x 330ml bottles • +4 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • Holds up to 106 bottles • 0 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 520 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Single door • Holds up to 120 x 330ml bottles • +4°C (+/-2) • External Dimensions: 600 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

V60SS

Looking for a Bar System?

• Single door • Holds up to 120 x 330ml bottles • +4°C (+/-2) • External Dimensions: 600 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

220ES GSS

• Double door • Holds up to 198 bottles • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 900 W 540 D 800 H • Parts Only

Go to pages 134-137... 250ES

V90-800

• Double door • Holds up to 117 330ml bottles + 78 150ml cans • +4°C (+/-2) • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 800 H • On Site Warranty

V90SS-850

Osborne chillers are available in a wide range of sizes and are perfect for display and storage of food or beverages. The 250ES double door cabinet is capable of holding up to 198 bottles at temperatures between 1-5°C. Single and triple door versions are also available - with slimline or low height options too. Energy saving features such as LED internal lighting and 12V “maglev” fans help to keep your products cold with maximum efficiency.

• Double door • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 900 W 540 D 900 H

126

• Holds up to 198 bottles • Auto defrost • Parts Only

• Double door • Holds up to 117 330ml bottles + 78 150ml cans • +4°C (+/-2) • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 850 H • On Site Warranty


BC9007 LED

BC9097 LED

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Undercounter Bottle Coolers

• Double door • Holds up to 180 bottles • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

Ideal for keeping power bills low, the Lec range of EfficienC LED Bottle Coolers are UK government Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) scheme approved, providing tax incentives to UK businesses buying these energy efficient items. Please contact our Sales Team for more details on the ECA scheme.

• Double door • Holds up to 180 bottles • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Double door • 0 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 520 D 900 H

M90S-SD

APDH

ECOAPDH

• Double door • Holds up to 207 x 330ml bottles • +4 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 520 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Double door • Holds up to 174 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +11°C • External Dimensions: 915 W 500 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

• Low energy compressor • Holds up to 174 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +11°C • External Dimensions: 915 W 500 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

AMPDS

BC12007 LED

M135SS

• Double door • Holds up to 240 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +11°C • External Dimensions: 1060 W 500 D 925 H • On Site Warranty

• Triple door • Holds up to 272 bottles • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 1350 W 520 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Triple door • Holds up to 272 x 330ml bottles • +4 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 1350 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• Holds up to 180 bottles • Auto defrost • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

BC9027 LED

127


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Top Loading Bottle Coolers & Frosters BW600

BM70

TD5018

• Top loading • Holds up to 158 x 330ml bottles • Lockable • External Dimensions: 608 W 634 D 903 H • On Site Warranty

• Top loading • Holds up to 140 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +6°C • External Dimensions: 700 W 560 D 875 H • On Site Warranty

• Top loading • Holds up to 396 x 355ml bottles • +0.5 to +3.3°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1261 W 677 D 848 H • On Site Warranty

BD3DR

BD4DR

GFGDR

• Top loading • 360 litre/302 bottle capacity • -2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1500 W 550 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• Top loading • 510 litre/417 bottle capacity • -2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1990 W 550 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• -5 to -10°C temperature range • 85 litre capacity • Glass door • External Dimensions: 510 W 510 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

BM100

GFSDR

• -5 to -10°C temperature range • 85 litre capacity • Solid door • External Dimensions: 510 W 510 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

FR90

For busy bars requiring high capacity storage, a top loading cooler is essential. The BM100 has a 210 bottle capacity with 2 sliding doors. All IMC top loading bottle coolers can be perfectly integrated with the Bartender® range of modular stainless steel bar workstations. See page 135 for more details.

• Top loading • +2 to +6°C • External Dimensions: 1000 W 560 D 875 H

128

• Holds up to 210 x 330ml bottles • Supplied with lock, bottle opener & catcher • On Site Warranty

• Chills glasses to between -17 and -20°C • Accepts up to 175 x 70mm glasses • Sliding cover • External Dimensions: 900 W 620 D 900 H • On Site Warranty


FR90SS

ABM32-1

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Frosters, Beer Dispensers, Mini Bars & Ice Makers

• Chills glasses to between -17 and -20°C • Accepts up to 175 x 70mm glasses • Sliding cover • External Dimensions: 900 W 620 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

The ABM32-1 has a 30 litre capacity and is intended for built-in installation. Designed to meet all functional and aesthetic requirements with an elegant anthracite finish - allowing it to fit in with any furnishing scheme. Thanks to a remarkable absorption system, operation is practically silent. With optimal insulation and temperature controls, energy consumption is kept to a minimum, ensuring low running costs and maximum respect for the environment.

• 1 door • Accommodates a variety of beer kegs • Direct draw dispensing • External Dimensions: 597 W 794 D 1010 H • On Site Warranty

• 30 litre capacity • Adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 400 W 420 D 490 H

ABM42-1

ABM42FSN

ICEU36

• 40 litre capacity • Built in model • Adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 400 W 440 D 560 H • Parts Only

• 40 litre capacity • Freestanding model • Adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 443 W 521 D 850 H • Parts Only

• 19kg/24 hour output • 6kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 333 W 457 D 599 H • On Site Warranty

ICEU36P

IM-21CNE

FGS23PAUK

• 19kg/24 hour output • 6kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 333 W 457 D 599 H • On Site Warranty

• 22kg/24 hour output • 11.5kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 398 W 495 D 695 H • On Site Warranty

• 23kg/24 hour output • 6kg built in storage bin • Produces solid ice cubes • External Dimensions: 375 W 487 D 595 H • On Site Warranty

• Built in model • Reversible door • Parts Only

Refrigeration

TDD1

129


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Refrigeration

Ice Makers ICEU46P

K20

IM-21CNE-HC

• 23kg/24 hour output • 8kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 390 W 515 D 640 H • On Site Warranty

• 24kg/24 hour output • 10kg storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 555 W 535 D 590 H • On Site Warranty

• 25kg/24 hour output • 11.5kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 398 W 451 D 695 H • On Site Warranty

IM-30CNE

K40

UG040A

• 28kg/24 hour output • 11.5kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 398 W 495 D 695 H • On Site Warranty

• 40kg/24 hour output • 20kg storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 555 W 535 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 41kg/24 hour output • 25kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 550 W 550 D 800 H • On Site Warranty

FGS35PAUK

730572

• 46kg/24 hour output • 25kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 500 W 580 D 910 H • On Site Warranty

FGS45CAUK

This solid cube machine is designed for specific use in bars and restaurants and is characterised by performance, reliability and ease of installation. The FGS35PAUK features a 35kg/24 hour output and 13kg built in storage bin.

• 35kg/24 hour output • Produces solid ice cubes • Spray system • Insulated ice storage chamber • R404a refrigerant • External Dimensions: 440 W 606 D 762/775 H

130

• 13kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • Recessed door • Backlit on/off switch on front panel • CFC free • On Site Warranty

• 45kg/24 hour output • 13kg built in storage bin • Produces hollow ice cubes • External Dimensions: 420 W 615 D 680 H • On Site Warranty


ICEU126

KM-50A

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Ice Makers

• 57kg/24 hour output • 22kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 467 W 570 D 912 H • On Site Warranty

This compact, self contained ice maker produces up to 50kg of clear, crescent ice every 24 hours, with a 23kg built in storage bin. The double sided stainless steel evaporator requires fewer cycles to produce a full bin of ice, meaning reduced energy consumption. Only the purest water molecules will freeze to the evaporator, resulting in crystal clear ice.

• 60kg/24 hour output • 22kg built in storage bin • Produces hollow ice cubes • External Dimensions: 500 W 610 D 760 H • On Site Warranty

• 50kg/24 hour output • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 603 W 545 D 850 H

DCM-60KE

IM-65NE-HC

KM-75A

• 60kg/24 hour output • 1.9kg maximum storage capacity • Dispenses cubelet ice • External Dimensions: 350 W 480 D 720 H • On Site Warranty

• 62kg/24 hour output • 26kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 633 W 506 D 840 H • On Site Warranty

• 75kg/24 hour output • 40kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 603 W 646 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

ICEU146P

FGS77PAUK

UG080A

• 75kg/24 hour output • 40kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 535 W 600 D 1033 H • On Site Warranty

• 77kg/24 hour output • 30kg built in storage bin • Produces solid ice cubes • External Dimensions: 650 W 645 D 875 H • On Site Warranty

• 80kg/24 hour output • 45kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 700 W 600 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

• 23kg built in storage bin • Produces crescent shaped ice • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

FGS60CAUK

131


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Ice Makers FM-80KE

For Chilled Beverage Solutions

• 85kg/24 hour output • 26kg built in storage bin • Produces flaked ice • External Dimensions: 640 W 600 D 800 H • On Site Warranty

IM-100NE

• 95g/24 hour output • 50kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 704 W 506 D 1200 H • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

Go to pages 152-153... ICEU225

FGS100GRAUK

FM-150KE

• 96kg/24 hour output • 34kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 610 W 610 D 991 H • On Site Warranty

• 100kg/24 hour output • 20kg built in storage bin • Produces flaked ice • External Dimensions: 630 W 645 D 955 H • On Site Warranty

• 150kg/24 hour output • 26kg built in storage bin • Produces flaked ice • External Dimensions: 640 W 600 D 800 H • On Site Warranty

IM-240ANE-HC

ICEO405F

• 235kg/24 hour output • External storage bin required • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 762 W 610 D 508 H • On Site Warranty

ICEO805F

This modular cube ice maker has a huge 235kg output over 24 hours and is the largest member of the new Emerald Class range of climate friendly machines. A range of storage bins are available, from 144 to 348kg. The closed water circuit offers the ultimate contamination protection, by reducing the number of points at which impurities can enter the ice making process.

• 235kg/24 hour output • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 560 W 700 D 880 H

132

• Modular storage bin required • Produces large ice cubes 28x28x32mm • On Site Warranty

• 408kg/24 hour output • External storage bin required • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 762 W 610 D 660 H • On Site Warranty


PE102C

PSR273UK

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Medical Refrigeration

• 1.4 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 379 W 500 D 702 H • On Site Warranty

The Lec Medical brand has grown to be a trusted name in medical refrigeration and the PSR273UK solid door pharmacy fridge is ideal for the storage of vaccines. Complete with an advanced digital temperature controller and a fitted lock for added security. An anti microbial handle helps prevents the potential spread of bacteria and infection.

• 1.4 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 379 W 500 D 702 H • On Site Warranty

• 9 cu ft capacity • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 595 W 670 D 1565 H

WR207C

PSR151UK

PGR151UK

• 2.8 cu ft capacity • +1 to +5°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 502 W 540 D 660 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 595 W 635 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 595 W 635 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

WSR151

PGR273UK

WSR288

• 5 cu ft capacity • +1 to +5°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 558 W 600 D 863 H • On Site Warranty

• 9 cu ft capacity • +2 to +8°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 595 W 660 D 1565 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 cu ft capacity • +1 to +5°C • Digital temperature control & display • External Dimensions: 595 W 670 D 1570 H • On Site Warranty

• +2 to +8°C • Temperature alarm • On Site Warranty

Refrigeration

PG102C

133


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Bar Equipment

Buying Guide

Functionality as well as looks matter for equipment being used front of house. It is extremely important for the back bar to not only be stylish, but to give an impression of high quality to attract and retain customers and for the layout to be conducive to efficient service, whilst ensuring the space available is maximised to its full potential to help influence and encourage over the bar sales. Success depends on careful planning, layout and design to enhance the customer experience, whilst improving staff performance and boosting profits. Bar display should be kept simple, yet effective and investment in clever pieces of equipment will help optimise layout and product display, whilst saving space, time and costs in an operation. Location and design of essential bar items such as refrigeration, ice machines, glass washers and blenders are an important consideration too within the overall scheme. To make things easier, complete bar workstations are now available – such as the IMC Bartender and Gamko Flexbar – which are designed to make running a bar as easy and as straight forward as possible, whilst increasing throughput, sales and profits. Modular in format, both provide for unlimited layouts with great flexibility, accommodating refrigerated and non-refrigerated sections, glass or standard door units, storage drawers, hand wash sinks, waste bins and even the option of internal LED lighting for unique effects and central electronic locking system for simple, fast bar lockdown at the end of the night – bespoke solutions for even the trickiest of sites.

Advantages • Self-contained workstations are energy saving, efficient and productive, helping to maximise sales and increase efficiency of staff, even cutting labour costs - ergonomic design will help improve staff performance. • A well planned bar area will help throughput of customers, create high visibility of products, be easier to maintain and clean and give an overall professional impression. • Food safety regulations can be met with the inclusion of a hand wash sink and with a properly designed back bar area, additional revenue can be gained from simple food sales.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Operators should assess their needs in terms of their site, bar area, customer base, throughput and drinks menu. Consider peaks in service and whether the bar area is going to be used for simple specific food/drink preparation too – for example bar snacks or smoothies. Also be mindful of any future plans to expand operations or change layout – a flexible bar system will help. • Build quality and reliability – Choose a leading brand with an established reputation for good quality, durability and reliability. These brands usually build in great operational features too and energy efficiency, which should always be considered. Look for a full manufacturer’s warranty – the minimum being at least a year. Many of the leading brands have warranties ranging from 2-4 years. Check the availability of spare parts and after sales service. • Operational features – for refrigerated cabinets, look for visible temperature displays and forced/blown air for uniformed temperatures, auto defrost, rapid cooling and self-closing doors (vital when in constant use during service), safety glass, adjustable and removable shelving for display flexibility and for ease of cleaning, look for coved internal corners, removable door gaskets and castors for moving units. Go for an easy to clean, durable stainless steel finish. • For ice-machines - check on ice-production per 24 hours and compare with usage, look at adequate storage bins, ease of access for cleaning and maintenance.

134

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


B1

BARTENDER

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Bar Systems, Drink Preparation & Ice

• 1 litre capacity • Polycarbonate jug • 0.6kW motor • External Dimensions: 200 W 200 D 410 H • Workshop Warranty

• 1.3 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • Powerful 3/8 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 203 D 387 H • Workshop Warranty

For more blending options

IMC’s Bartender system offers a unique blend of style and functionality, to make any bar environment run smoothly. Day or evening, Bartender is the ultimate workstation, designed to make running a bar as easy and stress-free as possible, increasing sales as a result. With a wide range of modules and accessories that offer unlimited options of bar layout, you can create a solution to meet any requirement. Units are available in up to 5 different widths, giving you the flexibility to design or specify the best bar possible. Please contact the Sales Team on 01296 663400 for a site survey and quotation.

• A complete stylish underbar solution • Contact us for details, surveys & quotations • Assures rapid, profitable service

• Wide variety of sizes & configurations • Adaptable to your precise needs • Robust, durable construction

HB450UK

M98

• 1.3 litre capacity • Polycarbonate container • Powerful 1 hp motor • External Dimensions: 165 W 229 D 432 H • Workshop Warranty

• Single spindle • 0.3kW fan cooled universal motor • 15000 rpm • External Dimensions: 200 W 220 D 450 H • Workshop Warranty

ES500

V90 ICE

K20

• 3000 rpm • High speed 0.7kW motor • Single speed • External Dimensions: 240 W 380 D 490 H • Workshop Warranty

• 2kg per minute output • 0.1kW fan cooled motor • Suitable for hollow ice only • External Dimensions: 210 W 230 D 460 H • Workshop Warranty

• 24kg/24 hour output • 10kg storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 555 W 535 D 590 H • On Site Warranty

See our Food Prep Section on pages 81-82...

Bar Equipment

HB908UK

135


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Bar Equipment

Ice Makers, Mini Bars & Bottle Coolers IM-21CNE-HC

FGS23PAUK

IM-45NE

• 25kg/24 hour output • 11.5kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 398 W 451 D 695 H • On Site Warranty

• 23kg/24 hour output • 6kg built in storage bin • Produces solid ice cubes • External Dimensions: 375 W 487 D 647/660 • On Site Warranty

• 44kg/24 hour output • 18kg built in storage bin • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 503 W 456 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

FGS100GRAUK

ICEO405F

ABM42FSN

• 100kg/24 hour output • 20kg built in storage bin • Produces flaked ice • External Dimensions: 630 W 645 D 955 H • On Site Warranty

• 235kg/24 hour output • External storage bin required • Air cooled • External Dimensions: 762 W 610 D 508 H • On Site Warranty

• 40 litre capacity • Freestanding model • Adjustable shelves • External Dimensions: 443 W 521 D 850 H • Parts Only

FLEXBAR

160ES GSS

• Single door • Holds up to 120 bottles • +1 to +5°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 597 W 540 D 800 H • Parts Only

BC6007 LED

Flexbar is a modular bar system offering flexible cooled drinks storage. Available in a wide variety of front and back bar options, this multi-purpose modular system is designed to provide you with exactly what you need. There are over 100 modules to choose from, offering more flexibility with 410mm and 540mm widths suitable for varying bar designs. Easy to assemble on location with non refrigerated modules also available for cocktail areas. Please contact the Sales Team on 01296 663400 for a site survey and quotation.

• Offers flexible cooled drink storage • Over 100 module options • Contact us for more details and a quotation

136

• Ambient cocktail options also available • Easy to assemble on site

• Single door • Holds up to 106 bottles • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 600 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty


M135SS

BC9027 LED

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Bottle Coolers, Frosters, Beer Dispensers & Wine Coolers

• Triple door • Holds up to 272 x 330ml bottles • +4 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 1350 W 500 D 900 H • On Site Warranty

This bestselling model is perfect for any bar set up. Sliding doors provide an ideal solution for anywhere space is limited, whilst maintaining a large 180 bottle capacity. LED lighting creates an attractive display for a multitude of chilled drinks, adding to customer appeal. This model is also fitted with a lock as standard, for security.

See Refrigeration Pages 125-127

• Double door • +2 to +10°C • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 900 H

• Holds up to 180 bottles • Auto defrost • On Site Warranty

BM100

BD4DR

GFGDR

• Top loading • Holds up to 210 x 330ml bottles • +2 to +6°C • External Dimensions: 1000 W 560 D 875 H • On Site Warranty

• Top loading • 510 litre/417 bottle capacity • -2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1990 W 550 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• -5 to -10°C temperature range • 85 litre capacity • Glass door • External Dimensions: 510 W 510 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

TDD1

FZ295W-SILVER

SCV115-1

• 1 door • Accommodates a variety of beer kegs • Direct draw dispensing • External Dimensions: 597 W 794 D 1010 H • On Site Warranty

• 338 litre capacity • Stores up to 86 bottles • 6 to 22°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 1550 W 600 D 600 H • On Site Warranty

• 198 bottle capacity • 5 to 22°C temperature range • Anti UV glass door • External Dimensions: 600 W 620 D 185 H • Parts Only

Bar Equipment

For more options...

137


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Buying Guide

Potential profit margins on hot beverages can exceed 300%, so it most definitely pays to get the offering right and never more so than now, in light of more discerning and informed consumers who are living in an age of the High Street coffee chain. Consumers’ love of premium coffees, teas and hot chocolate – such as latte, cappuccino and chai, are all set to continue and grow, so perfecting the hot beverages offering will help secure maximum opportunities from the trend, whilst enhancing the customer experience and boosting profits too. To produce premium beverages and be able to charge accordingly, quality equipment is a must. And whilst the end product may be a cup of coffee, there are different ways of making it and adding value. Depending on your offering, operation and venue there is all sorts of equipment from which to choose, starting with the simple hot water boiler, ideal for all drinks and additional catering uses, to pour and serve coffee systems, through to the semi and fully automatic coffee machines requiring various skill levels. Nowadays, a good quality hot drink (especially coffee) is an expectation not the exception and undoubtedly plays an important part in the overall impression a catering operation hopes to project to its customers, so it’s incredibly important to understand what the different beverage systems are and their benefits to determine which one is right for a business and save costly mistakes in the short and long term.

Advantages • Premium hot drinks can enhance an operation’s image – if done right! • Potential profit margins are extremely good for a relatively small investment. • Water boilers are ideal for any business and can be an easy and efficient way of producing large volumes of hot beverages and some models can be wall mounted or sited under counter to save on valuable counter space. Manual fill boilers can easily be re-located for added flexibility. They can also be used to serve other hot beverages including mulled wine or hot cider. LPG boilers are available for mobile/outdoor catering. • Semi and fully automatic bean to cup machines can produce premium hot drinks with minimal training of staff.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Assess equipment needs in terms of current and predicted volumes, the drinks variety offered, customer base and site/venue limitations. Consider peaks in service and where the equipment is to be sited – for service flow and any plumbing considerations. Hourly output should also be considered with regards to water boilers. A combination of equipment might work, not just machines alone. • Build quality and reliability – Choose a leading brand with an established reputation for good quality, durability and reliability. Don’t be tempted to go down the cheaper import route. Look for a full manufacturer’s warranty – the minimum being at least a year. Many of the leading brands have warranties ranging from 1-4 years. Check the availability of spare parts, service support and maintenance requirements. • Operational features – Look for eco-modes across all equipment. But for water boilers: built-in filtration to help reduce limescale build up, integral diagnostics, programmable metred cup measures, safety features such as locking taps and safety handles for lids/ portability, boil dry and safety cut-out thermostatic controls. For all coffee machines: stylish appearance if to be sited front of house, self-cleaning cycles or ease of cleaning if not, integral diagnostics, robust fitments. For semi-automatic machines: actual level of operator skill required, steamed milk wands with pressure gauges, plumbing requirements, electronic/ digital display. For automatic machines: range of beverages and cup throughput per hour.

138

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


DJK

C10STHF

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Kettles & Manual Fill Boilers

• 1.5 litre capacity • Cordless • Removable limescale filter • External Dimensions: 250 W 180 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

The Burco brand is synonymous with water boilers and their traditional manual fill urns remain among the best available today. The C10STHF holds up to 10 litres of water, with 20 and 30 litre models also available, providing large volumes of water on demand without the need for a fixed water supply.

• 1.7 litre capacity • Removable filter • Large viewing window • External Dimensions: 220 dia. 200 H • Workshop Warranty

• 10 litre capacity • 25 minute heat up time • Boil dry cut out • Safety lid and locking tap mechanism • External Dimensions: 305 W 335 D 380 H

BCK2L

BCK4L

C2T

• 2 litre capacity • 13 cup capacity • 5 min fast boil • External Dimensions: 270 W 190 D 225 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 4 litre capacity • 26 cup capacity • 8 min fast boil • External Dimensions: 310 W 230 D 305 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 2.5 litre capacity • 15 cup capacity • 7 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 240 W 250 D 325 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

C8T

U32A1D

MFCT1010

• 8 litre capacity • 50 cup capacity • 20 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 240 W 250 D 530 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 9 litre capacity • 55 cup capacity • Fully variable thermostat • External Dimensions: 300 W 345 D 390 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 10 litre capacity • Boil dry safety cut out • Concealed element • External Dimensions: 229 dia. 400 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 60 cup capacity • Variable stat • Concealed element • Side handles • NB. 1 Year Labour

Beverage Equipment

DDK1.7

139


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Manual Fill Boilers LWB4

U34A1D

GWB6P

• 18 litre capacity • Simmerstat controlled • Boil dry protection • External Dimensions: 300 W 300 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

• 18 litre capacity • 110 cup capacity • Fully variable thermostat • External Dimensions: 395 W 430 D 395 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 18 litre capacity • Piezo ignition • Flame failure • External Dimensions: 420 W 420 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

MFCT1020

BGAS

BGASDLP

• 20 litre capacity • Boil dry safety cut out • Concealed element • External Dimensions: 284 dia. 460 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 20 litre capacity • 120 cup capacity • 50 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 405 W 415 D 545 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 20 litre capacity • 120 cup capacity • 50 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 360 W 415 D 555 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

U36A1D

C20STHF

• 20 litre capacity • 120 cup capacity • 45 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 390 W 420 D 380 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

LWB6

Offering a more affordable option, Cygnet trade manual fill boilers are available in 9, 18 or 27 litre sizes - the U36A1D is the biggest in the range. All models have fully variable thermostats and carrying handles for easy transportation when empty.

• 27 litre capacity • Fully variable thermostat • External Dimensions: 395 W 425 D 500 H

140

• 165 cup capacity • 3kW element with boil dry safety cut out • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 27 litre capacity • Simmerstat controlled • Boil dry protection • External Dimensions: 365 W 365 D 500 H • On Site Warranty


MFCT1030

1000M

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Manual & Auto Fill Boilers

• 30 litre capacity • Boil dry safety cut out • Concealed element • External Dimensions: 350 dia. 455 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

Perfect for caterers that are short of space, the Instanta 1000M is designed to fit on a worktop or below wall cupboards. The 3 litre capacity can provide an output of up to 20 litres per hour and it takes just 17 minutes for water to reach the required serving temperature.

• 30 litre capacity • 180 cup capacity • 70 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 390 W 420 D 480 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 3 litre draw off • Self diagnostics system • Compact countertop unit • External Dimensions: 218 W 465 D 400 H

WA2N

2W3W

AFWM3

• 2.5 litre draw off • 18 litre minimum output per hour • Basic fault self diagnosis • External Dimensions: 254 W 187 D 428 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 litre draw off • 23 litre/142 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 320 W 270 D 435 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 3 litre capacity • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • Descale warning LED • External Dimensions: 344 W 279 D 346 H • On Site Warranty

WM3

2W3SS

WM3SS

• 3 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 332 W 298 D 452 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 litre draw off • 23 litre/142 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 320 W 270 D 435 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 3 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 332 W 298 D 452 H • On Site Warranty

• 20 litre minimum hourly output • Drip tray included • Insulated for minimal heat loss & energy use • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

C30STHF

141


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Auto Fill Boilers HWA20

WA5

WMT5

• 3 litre draw off • 18 litre throughput per hour • Fitted with thermostat • External Dimensions: 205 W 355 D 430 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 5 litre draw off • 27 litre minimum output per hour • Basic fault self diagnosis • External Dimensions: 285 W 285 D 430 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 litre draw off • 24 litre/133 cup output per hour • Energy efficient • External Dimensions: 325 W 222 D 447 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

BWM5F

3W5SS

1000-C

• 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 29 minute heat up time • Built in water filter • External Dimensions: 344 W 279 D 497 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 litre draw off • 25 litre/155 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 320 W 270 D 510 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 5 litre draw off • 27 litre minimum output per hour • Self diagnostics system • External Dimensions: 218 W 345 D 440 H • On Site Warranty

BCT5F

PB5

• 5 litre draw off • 28 litre/156 cup output per hour • Energy efficient • External Dimensions: 210 W 464 D 465 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

WM7

The entry model in the Burco filtration range, the BCT5F is compact and countertop, offering a 5 litre capacity. The internal filtration system inhibits limescale build-up and other impurities to prolong the life of the appliance and provide the best tasting beverage. In addition, an advanced LCD touch control screen provides great user functionality and the advanced diagnostics alert the user when the filter cartridge needs to be replaced.

• 5.7 litre draw off • 22 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 447 H

142

• 206 cup/31 litre per hour • Built in water filter • On Site Warranty

• 7 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 350 W 310 D 498 H • On Site Warranty


3W7.5W

EB3FX

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Auto Fill Boilers

• 7.5 litre draw off • 27 litre/170 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 350 W 270 D 610 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 7.5 litre capacity • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 29 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 279 D 497 H • On Site Warranty

A recently relaunched version of one of our most popular models, the Lincat EB3FX provides hot water on tap, 24 hours a day. Packed with features including a unique built-in water filtration system and advanced diagnostics with LCD display. The water temperature can be easily adjusted to suit all requirements and the EB3FX can produce up to 31 litres of water per hour.

• 11 litre draw off • Built in filtration • External Dimensions: 250 W 525 D 600 H

• 31 litre/205 cup output per hour • Enhanced diagnostics • On Site Warranty

WM7SS

UCD7

UCD7/L

• 7 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 350 W 310 D 498 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour - 3kW • Undercounter boiler • External Dimensions: 185 W 185 D 221 H • On Site Warranty

• 7 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour - 3kW • Undercounter boiler • External Dimensions: 185 W 185 D 321 H • On Site Warranty

WA10N

3W10W

AWB3

• 10 litre draw off • 27 litre minimum output per hour • Basic fault self diagnosis • External Dimensions: 340 W 247 D 480 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre draw off • 30 litre/185 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 350 W 270 D 610 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 7 litre draw off • 12.5 litre capacity • Electronic control • External Dimensions: 260 W 605 D 615 H • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

AFWM7.5

143


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Auto Fill Boilers EB4FX

1501F

CPF210

• 11 litre draw off • 45 litre/300 cup output per hour • Built in filtration • External Dimensions: 250 W 525 D 600 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Built-in filtration • External Dimensions: 252 W 518 D 610 H • On Site Warranty

• 10 litre draw off • 28 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 260 W 555 D 705 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

3C10

CPF310

T10

• 10 litre draw off • 30 litre/185 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 240 W 355 D 570 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 11 litre draw off • 57 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 260 W 555 D 705 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

• 10 litre draw off • 28 litre/156 cup output per hour • Energy efficient • External Dimensions: 210 W 630 D 590 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

AFCT10

CPF2100

• 10 litre draw off • 28 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 260 W 555 D 610 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

BCT10F

The Burco AFCT10 has a capacity of 10 litres, making it perfect for most catering establishments. An energy saving ‘Eco’ mode helps to reduce day to day running costs and the unit is fully WRAS approved. The usual Burco quality is backed up by a full 1 year parts & labour warranty to give you peace of mind.

• 11.5 litre draw off • 34 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 568 H

144

• 206 cup/31 litre per hour • Descale warning LED • On Site Warranty

• 11.5 litre draw off • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 34 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 568 H • On Site Warranty


PB10

WM15-6SS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Auto Fill Boilers

• 10 litre draw off • 28 litre/156 cup output per hour • Energy efficient • External Dimensions: 210 W 464 D 590 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

Wall mounted boilers are perfect where worktop space is limited and the WM15-6SS provides a stylish stainless steel finish. 6kW hardwired electrics increase the potential output to a huge 57 litres per hour. This model also includes a 7 day timer, so that the machine can be programmed to turn on automatically before service.

• 11.5 litre draw off • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 34 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 320 D 568 H • On Site Warranty

• 15 litre draw off • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 350 W 330 D 545 H

3W15SS

WM15-3SS

UCD12/L

• 15 litre draw off • 35 litre/215 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 350 W 270 D 755 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 15 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 350 W 330 D 545 H • On Site Warranty

• 12 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour - 3kW • Undercounter boiler • External Dimensions: 185 W 185 D 321 H • On Site Warranty

KUD

DB2000

WB2

• 12 litre draw off • 40 litre/250 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 380 W 275 D 535 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 12 litre draw off • 28 litre mimimum output per hour • Simple push and hold dispense button • External Dimensions: 260 W 465 D 608 H • On Site Warranty

• 13 litre draw off • 23 litre minimum output per hour • Powerful 14psi working pressure steam arm • External Dimensions: 345 W 635 D 565 H • On Site Warranty

• 57 litre minimum output per hour • Energy save mode • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

BCT10FPB

145


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Auto Fill Boilers WB2-6

3001F

CPF510

• 13 litre draw off • 51 litre minimum output per hour • Powerful 14psi working pressure steam arm • External Dimensions: 345 W 635 D 565 H • On Site Warranty

• 17 litre draw off • 28 litre minimum output per hour • Built-in filtration • External Dimensions: 308 W 518 D 618 H • On Site Warranty

• 17 litre draw off • 28 litre hourly output • Integral 7 day programmable timer • External Dimensions: 360 W 555 D 705 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

CPF520-3

CPF4100-3

EB6FX

• 17 litre draw off • 28 litre hourly output • Integral 7 day programmable timer • External Dimensions: 360 W 555 D 705 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

• 17 litre draw off • 28 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 360 W 555 D 610 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

• 18 litre draw off • 60 litre/400 cup output per hour • Built in filtration • External Dimensions: 250 W 525 D 690 H • On Site Warranty

KUD3DF

EB6TFX

• 18 litre draw off • 60 litre/400 cup output per hour • Built in filtration • External Dimensions: 250 W 525 D 690 H • On Site Warranty

CPF520-6

Already specified to one of the UK’s best known stores, the Calomax KUD3DF is perfectly suited to medium to high volume applications. Ideal for front of house positioning with a stylish two-tone casing, there is also an optional mirror finish cover to conceal the rear connections.

• 22 litre draw off • Integral scale inhibitor • Countertop • External Dimensions: 380 W 275 D 745 H

146

• 50 litre/312 cup output per hour • Cool to touch casing • Twin taps with different flow rates • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 19 litre draw off • 57 litre hourly output • Integral 7 day programmable timer • External Dimensions: 360 W 555 D 705 H • NB. 2 Year Labour


CPF4100-6

UCD47/D

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Auto Fill Boilers

• 19 litre draw off • 57 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 360 W 555 D 610 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

Instanta undercounter boilers provide a solution for any establishment from a small office to a large stadium. The stylish stainless steel countertop font can be used with 3 different sizes of boiler unit, depending on the output requirement. The UCD47/D can provide up to 42 litres of hot water per hour and comes with 2 dispense fonts, which are also available for use with tall cups on request.

• 22 litre draw off • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 56 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 689 H • On Site Warranty

• 47 litre draw off • Undercounter boiler • External Dimensions: 185 W 185 D 321 H

AFCT20

BCT20TTF

KUD6DF

• 22 litre draw off • 206 cup/31 litre per hour • 56 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 689 H • On Site Warranty

• 399 cup/60 litre per hour • Twin tap • 34 minute heat up time • External Dimensions: 344 W 464 D 689 H • On Site Warranty

• 22 litre draw off • 78 litre/487 cup output per hour • Integral scale inhibitor • External Dimensions: 380 W 275 D 745 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

KUD9DF

WM25-6SS

CPF6100-6

• 22 litre draw off • 109 litre/681 cup output per hour • 3 phase only • External Dimensions: 380 W 275 D 745 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 25 litre draw off • 57 litre minimum output per hour • Unique info display • External Dimensions: 410 W 304 D 596 H • On Site Warranty

• 27 litre draw off • 57 litre hourly output • Built in multi-purpose filtration • External Dimensions: 440 W 555 D 610 H • NB. 2 Year Labour

• 46 itre minimum output per hour • Twin push button countertop font • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

BCT20F

147


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Auto Fill Boilers, Coffee Percolators & Coffee Machines CT6000-9

UCD47

CT8000-6

• 36 litre draw off • 85 litre min output per hour • 3 phase only • External Dimensions: 440 W 555 D 608 H • On Site Warranty

• 47 litre draw off • 46-71 litre minimum output per hour • Undercounter boiler • External Dimensions: 185 W 185 D 221 H • On Site Warranty

• 45 litre draw off • 57 litre minimum output per hour • Twin tap • External Dimensions: 440 W 560 D 760 H • On Site Warranty

MOD18

DCP

CP100

• 135 litre draw off • 204 litre minimum output per hour • 3 phase only • External Dimensions: 660 W 550 D 892 H • On Site Warranty

• 1.5 litre capacity • 10 litre output • Polished stainless steel • External Dimensions: 250 W 180 D 220 H • Workshop Warranty

• 100 cup/16 litre capacity • 65 minute heating time • Sight glass • External Dimensions: 330 W 350 D 600 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

NOVO2

MONDO2

• Manual fill • 2 decanters and 2 hotplates included • 18 litres/144 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 195 W 406 D 446 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

MATIC2

This easy to use filter coffee machine requires no plumbing, so is perfect for portable catering or sites with limited water supply. Supplied with a single 1.7 litre glass decanter as standard, but with 2 hotplates you can be brewing and serving coffee at the same time. The NOVO2 is capable of producing up to 18 litres of coffee per hour.

• Manual fill • 18 litres/144 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 214 W 391 D 424 H

148

• 2 decanters and 2 hotplates included • 5 minute brew time • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Auto fill • 2 decanters and 2 hotplates included • 15 litres/120 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 215 W 353 D 618 H • NB. 1 Year Labour


MONDOTWIN

AZZURI CLASSICO

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Coffee & Coffee/Chocolate Machine

• Manual fill • 4 decanters and 4 hotplates included • 28 litres/224 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 404 W 406 D 446 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

A highly stylised bean to cup coffee machine for use with fresh beans and fresh milk to produce high quality barista style coffee. The AZZURRI CLASSICO features a highly intelligent one touch fully automated system from grinding to dispensing and can create up to 4 hot beverage options.

• Coffee: 189 cups per hour • Water: 156 cups per hour • Plumbed in • External Dimensions: 362 W 575 D 760 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Fully automatic bean to cup machine • 750g coffee bean hopper • 1.7 litre removable water tank • Automatic milk frothing system • External Dimensions: 310 W 450 D 700 H

CMM

TH

CMA

• Manual fill • 2 decanters and 2 hotplates included • 126 cup throughput per hour • External Dimensions: 205 W 380 D 435 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Manual fill • Accepts 2.2 litre vacuum flask/airpot • 18 litres/144 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 235 W 406 D 545 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Auto fill • Includes 2.3 litre insulated airpot • 120 cup throughput per hour • External Dimensions: 205 W 380 D 565 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

THA

RLX75

BOLERO1

• Auto fill • Accepts 2.2 litre vacuum flask/airpot • 15 litres/120 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 235 W 406 D 545 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Auto fill • 2 litre fixed container + hot water tap • 13 litres/105 cups coffee • External Dimensions: 475 W 509 D 611 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• For instant coffee or hot chocolate • Single canister • 30 litres/240 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 245 W 400 D 572 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 6 drink options • 80-100 cup per day output • Auto clean function • 1.4kW • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

QWIKBREW

149


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Coffee/Chocolate Machines & Coffee Espresso Machines BOLERO2

FRESHGROUND 310

ESPRECIOUS12

• For instant coffee or hot chocolate • Twin canister • 30 litres/240 cups approx per hour • External Dimensions: 245 W 400 D 572 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• Grinder for fresh filtered coffee • 3 canisters for instant ingredients • Fresh brew 17.5 litres per hour • External Dimensions: 335 W 505 D 901 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 1 x bean canister & 2 x instant canisters • Grinder • Espresso 3.3 litres per hour • External Dimensions: 330 W 570 D 660 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

CONCETTO

XD1COMPACT

GD1COMPACT

• Bean to cup machine • Includes warranty, install, delivery & filter • Built in grinder • External Dimensions: 370 W 530 D 610 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 340 W 510 D 530 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 375 W 540 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

XL423

E61 LEGEND 2S

• 2 group semi-automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 715 W 540 D 565 H • On Site Warranty

XD2COMPACT

The XL423 is designed to work with instant ingredients and has a total of 4 canisters for up to 9 different beverages: coffee, coffee crème, espresso, cappuccino, chocolate, coffee with milk, wiener melange, double espresso and hot water. The machine has been equipped with lighted operating panel, drip-tray, automatic descale indicator and rinsing programme.

• Automatic machine for instant ingredients • Up to 10 beverages • External Dimensions: 316 W 455 D 574 H

150

• 4 canisters • 11 second brew time • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 540 W 510 D 530 H • On Site Warranty


GD2COMPACT

E982A

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Coffee Espresso Machines

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 550 W 540 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

This 2 group traditionally styled coffee espresso machine is supplied as a full starter pack including delivery, installation and warranty - as well as a coffee grinder and water filter.

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 625 W 510 D 472 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 group automatic • Grinder and water filter included • 2 x steam wands • Grey and stainless finish • External Dimensions: 770 W 510 D 485 H

TEOREMA 2A

XD2EV

GD2

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 776 W 510 D 495 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 group automatic (3 group shown) • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 625 W 510 D 472 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 760 W 540 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

D902

DECCO2A

XD3EV

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 670 W 508 D 446 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 670 W 508 D 446 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 845 W 510 D 472 H • On Site Warranty

• Includes delivery, install & warranty • Auto fill 11 litre boiler • 1 x hot water spout • Boiler pressure gauge • On Site Warranty

Beverage Equipment

LCD2

151


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Beverage Equipment

Coffee Espresso Machines, Grinders & Water Coolers GD3

DECCO3A

MD58

• 3 group automatic • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 970 W 540 D 500 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 group automatic (2 group shown) • Includes delivery, install & warranty • Grinder and water filter included • External Dimensions: 890 W 508 D 446 H • On Site Warranty

• 58mm grinding disc • Fully automatic operation • Hopper accepts up to 600g of coffee beans • External Dimensions: 190 W 210 D 460 H • Parts Only

MD64

CH1000

CW728

• 64mm grinding disc • Fully automatic operation • Hopper accepts up to 600g of coffee beans • External Dimensions: 170 W 360 D 515 H • Parts Only

• 60-80 cups cold water per hour • Hot water rapid draw off 20 cups • 28 litres per hr • External Dimensions: 233 W 503 D 579 H • On Site Warranty

• Dispenses cold & ambient water • Plumbed in Point of Use unit • Tabletop • External Dimensions: 320 W 380 D 475 H • Parts Only

DC728H

EDV-FS-BP

• Dispenses hot & cold water • Plumbed in Point of Use unit • Instantly chilled mains water • External Dimensions: 320 W 380 D 475 H • Parts Only

EDV-TT-BP

This stylish freestanding unit has been cleverly designed to contain all the necessary components needed to produce great tasting, chilled, filtered water (still & sparkling) direct from the local water supply. The system’s impressive design makes it the ideal choice to be featured front-of-house and dispenses either into designer bottles, or directly to glasses. This system has proven to be a popular choice in some of London’s finest restaurants and hotels.

• Fresh filtered water system • Chilled • External Dimensions: 500 W 525 D 1487 H

152

• Freestanding • Still or sparkling • On Site Warranty

• Fresh filtered water system • Tabletop • Chilled • External Dimensions: 360 W 574 D 566 H • On Site Warranty


UCCH100

LJD2

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Water Coolers, Refrigerated Dispensers & Slush Machines

• Plumbed in • 20 litre minimum hourly output (120 cups) • Illuminated push button dispenser • External Dimensions: 180 W 340 D 390 H • On Site Warranty

The Interlevin LJD range of juice dispensers offers a versatile way to chill and serve a variety of drinks at the perfect temperature. The design allows easy cleaning and the stainless tap can quickly be removed for cleaning. The paddle stirring system ensures even cooling of the drink and is suitable for diluted concentrates, fruit juice and even milk if required. The LJD2 has 2 x 12 litre tanks, with single and triple versions also available.

• Dispenses cold & ambient water • Plumbed in Point of Use unit • Floorstanding • External Dimensions: 330 W 360 D 1080 H • Parts Only

• 2 x 12 litre capacity • +2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 430 W 430 D 635 H

CW798H

ABIB01

LJD1

• Dispenses hot & cold water • Plumbed in Point of Use unit • Floorstanding • External Dimensions: 320 W 365 D 1060 H • Parts Only

• 10 litre capacity • ‘Bag in box’ system for milk • Quick and easy to use • External Dimensions: 360 W 400 D 740 H • On Site Warranty

• 1 x 12 litre capacity • Suitable for juice or milk • +2 to +8°C temperature range • External Dimensions: 230 W 430 D 635 H • Parts Only

ANU

MI75x2

ST12x3

• 13.6 litre capacity • ‘Bag in box’ system for non carbonated drinks • Illuminated with branding option • External Dimensions: 360 W 476.5 D 809 H • On Site Warranty

• 2 x 7.5 litre tanks • 2 x 5 litre mix capacity • For fruit slushes, iced coffees and more • External Dimensions: 420 W 380 D 705 H • On Site Warranty

• 3 x 12 litre tanks • 3 x 9 litre mix capacity • For fruit slushes, iced coffees and more • External Dimensions: 598 W 468 D 897 H • On Site Warranty

• Suitable for juice or milk • Fully automatic • Parts Only

Beverage Equipment

CW698

153


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Warewashing

Buying Guide

Warewashers have become increasingly sophisticated with technological advancements to optimise wash performance, whilst improving efficiency and energy consumption. There is a wide variety of different machine options available: the most important element is to identify the right machine with the right specification for your application and the space available. The ranges vary from compact, under-counter front loading dish and glasswashers to the more powerful and faster pass through rack and flight machines. Ideally you should have separate machines for glass and plate/pot washing, but there are machines that can tackle both. Energy efficiency is a high priority - certain models now have innovative energy saving features and higher specification levels that make the machines much more economical to run on a day to day basis and save considerable costs in labour too. When buying a unit consider the cost of ownership and not just the purchase price (purchase costs + running costs + life expectancy) - machines with better specification levels that cost that little bit more are well worth the investment for the long term and for vital food safety too. Warewashing equipment is usually in continual use throughout the day and is a vital part of food safety and an operation’s overall service and presentation, so ensuring you get the right machine for the job is crucial, but also check the whole wash area works as efficiently as possible too. With this in mind, look at our comprehensive range of stainless steel tabling to complement all warewashers for efficient loading and unloading.

Advantages • Innovations include programmes which eliminate the need for manual pre-washing, with adjustable cycle times and variable water pressures to allow operators to change the programme according to the level of soiling and fluctuations during peak service times, giving improved productivity and flexibility. • Water saving features help reduce running costs, plus filtration systems help keep the wash water cleaner for longer, saving energy needed to heat new water and reducing the need for more chemicals too. • Diagnostic monitoring can help ensure the equipment operates at its best, especially relevant in light of potential new regulations that will require caterers to test for the hygienic operation of their machines, ensuring they operate at the optimum 82oC temperature for hygienic cleaning.

Advantages By choosing the right model and maintaining it, you can expect it to last around 10 years.

154

• Capacity – Think of the maximum number of covers it will need to cope with. Plan ahead to ensure it is suitable for current demand and peaks plus any future plans for expansion – think long term investment. Adding dedicated racks for tall glasses or large trays can maximise the productivity and capacity and reduce operating times. • Build quality and reliability – Price is a key consideration but don’t go down the cheaper route, choose a leading commercial brand. Higher prices are usually justified due to higher grade components for a longer life and better results too. A full manufacturer’s warranty, spare parts availability and good after sales service, including a maintenance contract, are advised. • Operational features – Double skinned construction to minimise noise levels and reduce heat loss. Optional drain heat recovery units that use waste water to heat the fresh incoming water, reducing the amount of energy used. Energy standby features that allow water temperatures to drop and be maintained at safe (but lower) temperatures in periods when the machine isn’t being used. Lower rinse water consumption and smaller wash tanks for greater economic performance, reducing electric, water and chemical usage without compromising on hygiene or results. Integral water softeners (or consider machines that use reverse osmosis) to combat limescale build-up and help prolong the life of the machine and maintain wash results. Peristaltic auto-dosing pumps to ensure correct chemicals usage. Insulated water boilers to reduce heat loss and running costs.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


LB200

LB215

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Glasswashers

• 350mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 2 minute cycle time • External Dimensions: 430 W 520 D 635 H • On Site Warranty

The Comenda LB215 is perfectly suited to back bar applications and restaurants and also available with drain pump or internal softener options. Capable of handling up to 30 racks per hour with a preset cycle time of 120 seconds, it has a large clearance height of 205mm ensuring suitability for most glass heights. Rinse temperature interlock system comes as standard, along with an inbuilt stainless steel micro filtration system for durability and maximum hygiene.

• 350mm square basket • 30 basket per hour output • 120 second cycle time • External Dimensions: 420 W 495 D 645 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • 2 minute cycle time • External Dimensions: 460 W 520 D 635 H

ECO1

SG4E

P41B

• 350mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 2 minute cycle time • External Dimensions: 410 W 512 D 640 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 2 wash cycles • External Dimensions: 460 W 521 D 680 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • 30 basket per hour output • 120 second cycle time • External Dimensions: 470 W 535 D 710 H • On Site Warranty

UG405DSUK

CWG420D-1

402082

• 400mm square basket • 40/24/15 baskets per hour • Integral water softener • External Dimensions: 440 W 530 D 710 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm basket • Up to 60 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 6 programs • External Dimensions: 488 W 530 D 705 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Max 30 racks/hr • 120 second cycle time • External Dimensions: 456 W 495 D 700 H • On Site Warranty

• Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • Hot or cold water feed • On Site Warranty

Warewashing

P35

155


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Warewashing

Glasswashers LB215DP

ECO2P

X40BD

• 400mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 2 minute cycle time • External Dimensions: 460 W 520 D 635 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Max output of 30 racks/hour • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 450 W 550 D 750 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 120, 130 and 180 second cycle times • External Dimensions: 470 W 535 D 670 H • On Site Warranty

DUO2

BC2E

402115

• 400mm square basket • Max output 30 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 470 W 550 D 760 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Maximum output of 40 racks per hour • 1.5/2/3/8 minute cyle times • External Dimensions: 480 W 540 D 650 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Max 30 racks/hr • 120 second cycle time • External Dimensions: 460 W 565 D 715 H • On Site Warranty

UG405DUK

690028

• 500mm square basket • Max 30 racks/hr • 90 or 180 second cycle times • External Dimensions: 600 W 610 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

CWG521SDUK

Part of the growing range of Smeg Warewashing solutions, this model offers high quality at an affordable price. An insulated double skinned door helps to keep energy usage to a minimum and a self diagnostic system with fault warning offers peace of mind.

• 400mm square basket • 3 programs • Drain pump • Self diagnosis system with fault warning • External Dimensions: 440 W 530 D 710 H

156

• 40/24/15 baskets per hour • Rinse aid & detergent dispensers • Insulated double skinned door • Self cleaning cycle • On Site Warranty

• 500mm basket • Up to 60 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H • On Site Warranty


UC-ME

LF324

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Glasswashers & Undercounter Dishwashers

• 500mm square basket • Maximum output of 48 racks per hour • 1 phase • External Dimensions: 600 W 657 D 715 H • On Site Warranty

Part of the Comenda Essential range, the LF324 dishwasher has been one of our most popular models for many years. Supplied as standard with a drain pump and WRAS approved to Category 5, this model is suitable for any application. An internal water softener is also available at extra cost.

• 500mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 550 W 630 D 825 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm basket • Hot or cold feed • Drain/rinse booster pump • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H

DUO3/WS

F3EHR

SW262M

• 500mm square basket • Max output 30 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 570 W 630 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 60 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 600 W 610 D 730 H • On Site Warranty

• For semi professional use • Twin basket • Electronic soft touch controls • External Dimensions: 600 W 605 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

SWT262T

PG808013A

PG8080U32A

• For semi professional use • Twin basket • Electronic soft touch controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 600 W 605 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• Freestanding • 2 baskets • 9 programmes • External Dimensions: 598 W 600 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

• Built under • 2 baskets • 9 programmes • External Dimensions: 598 W 600 D 805 H • On Site Warranty

• Max 30 racks/hr • Internal class ‘A’ air gap • Detergent/rinse aid injectors • 3.2kW/5.8kW/8.5kW • On Site Warranty

Warewashing

ECO3

157


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Warewashing

Undercounter Dishwashers PG8082SCiXXL

PG8083SCViXXL

H400

• Semi integrated • 2 baskets • 9 programmes • External Dimensions: 598 W 570 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

• Fully integrated • 2 baskets • 9 programmes • External Dimensions: 598 W 570 D 845 H • On Site Warranty

• 400mm square basket • Max 20 racks/hr • 3 min cycle time • External Dimensions: 450 W 550 D 750 H • On Site Warranty

DUO400

PG8055

PG8056

• 400mm basket • Max 20 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 470 W 550 D 760 H • On Site Warranty

• 9 minute cycle time • Up to 40 cycles a day • White finish • External Dimensions: 598 W 580 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

• 5 minute cycle time • Up to 40 cycles a day • White finish • External Dimensions: 598 W 580 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

CW521DUK

PG8056SS

• 5 minute cycle time • Up to 40 cycles a day • Stainless Steel finish • External Dimensions: 598 W 580 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

PG8058

This fully double skinned and insulated dishwasher is perfect for energy concious operations and also incorporates all key features required for the busy caterer. Rinse aid and detergent dispensers ensure ease of use, along with electronic controls with a total of 7 programs.

• 500mm basket • Electronic controls with 7 programs • Drain pump & triple stage filter system • Self diagnostic system • Rinse booster pump • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H

158

• Up to 60 baskets per hour • Double skinned & insulated • Multi phase machine switchable on site • Detergent and rinse aid dispensers • Powerful 2kW wash tank heating element • On Site Warranty

• 13 wash programmes • 5 minute cycle time • Stainless Steel finish • External Dimensions: 598 W 598 D 835 H • On Site Warranty


PG8059SS

502033

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Undercounter Dishwashers

• 13 wash programmes • 83°C final rinse temperature • Stainless Steel finish • External Dimensions: 598 W 598 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

The ‘Green & Clean’ 502033 dishwasher includes a built in atmospheric boiler to raise water input at 50°C to a minimum of 84°C for santizing, with no need for an external booster. The ‘Wash Safe Control’ feature confirms that all items have been rinsed correctly at the end of each cycle.

• 500mm square basket • Max 30 racks/hr • No class ‘A’ air gap • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Green and Clean • Wash safe control • Drain, detergent & rinse aid pumps • External Dimensions: 600 W 612 D 850 H

P50B

SD5ECBT

H700P

• 500mm square basket • 20 baskets per hour output • 180 second cycle time • External Dimensions: 600 W 630 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 30 racks per hour • 2 wash cycles • External Dimensions: 600 W 620 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 20 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 550 W 630 D 825 H • On Site Warranty

UC-LE

H750M

LF324A

• 500mm square basket • Max output 48 racks/hr • 1 phase • External Dimensions: 600 W 657 D 810 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 20 racks/hr • 3 min cycle time • External Dimensions: 550 W 630 D 825 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm basket • Max 30 racks/hr • Hot or cold feed • External Dimensions: 600 W 620 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

• Max 40 racks per hour • Double skinned • Hot/cold feed • 5.35kW • On Site Warranty

Warewashing

LF321

159


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Warewashing

Undercounter & Passthrough Dishwashers CW521SDUK

X60B

502034

• 500mm basket • Up to 60 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Up to 30 baskets per hour output • 120, 150 and 180 second cycle times • External Dimensions: 600 W 630 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 40 racks per hour • Green and Clean • External Dimensions: 600 W 612 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

DUO750

F4EHR

DUO750/WS

• 500mm basket • Max 20 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 570 W 630 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 60 racks/hr • Hot or cold feed • External Dimensions: 600 W 610 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm basket • Max 20 racks/hr • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 570 W 630 D 835 H • On Site Warranty

CW522D

F4EHRA

• 500mm square basket • Max 60 racks/hr • Hot or cold feed • External Dimensions: 600 W 610 D 830 H • On Site Warranty

SH50E

This high output undercounter dishwasher bridges the gap for users not able to invest their money or space in a full passthrough system. The ability to accept 2x 500mm baskets can mean double the output of a traditional undercounter model, as well as including all the key features of the Smeg Foodservice Warewashing range.

• 2 x 500mm baskets • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 600 W 600 D 820 H

160

• Up to 120 baskets per hour • Detergent & rinse aid injectors • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Maximum output of 30 racks per hour • 120, 180 or 240 cycle lengths • External Dimensions: 710 W 740 D 1860 H • On Site Warranty


CWC520D

DISHWASH SOLUTIONS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Passthrough Dishwashers

• 500mm basket • Up to 72 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions:614 W 732 D 1580/2055 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • 30 racks/hr • Hot or cold feed • External Dimensions: 720 W 750 D 1470 H • On Site Warranty

Part of the unique Simply Stainless Modular Fabrications system, a range of accessories to suit leading warewashing products. Including cleans and dirties tables in a variety of sizes as well as basket cassettes and pre rinse sprays. All available off the shelf for Next Day Delivery as standard! Contact our Sales Team for more details... • SS07 – ‘Cleans’ outlet bench, 1200/1650mm wide, Suits leading commercial dishwashers • SS08 – ‘Dirties’ inlet bench, 1200/1650mm wide, Suits leading commercial dishwashers • SS09 – ‘Dirties’ inlet bench, 1200/1650mm wide, Suits leading commercial dishwashers • SS36DBC – Accepts 4 x 500 x 500mm dishwasher baskets, Easy to fit bolt on accessory • SSAJPR30 – Deck mounted pre rinse spray, To fit all Simply Stainless sinks, Twin pedestal

505070

X100C

PT-ME

• 500mm square basket • Max 80 racks per hour • 3 phase • External Dimensions: 746 W 755 D 1549 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Up to 60 baskets per hour output • 60, 120 and 180 second cycle times • External Dimensions: 640 W 756 D 1920 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Maximum output of 48 racks per hour • 3 phase • External Dimensions: 635 W 750 D 1515 H • On Site Warranty

CWC520SD

505072

LC411MADP

• 500mm basket • Up to 72 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 614 W 732 D 1580/2055 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 80 racks per hour • 3 phase • External Dimensions: 746 W 755 D 1549 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • 30 racks/hr • Internal softener • External Dimensions: 720 W 750 D 1470 H • On Site Warranty

Warewashing

LC411

161


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Warewashing

Passthrough Dishwashers LC700

LC900

H857

• 500mm square basket • 40 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • 48 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 40 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 630W 720D 1520/1940 H • On Site Warranty

LC900DP

H857A

504257

• 500mm square basket • 48 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 40 racks/hr • Class ‘A’ air gap • External Dimensions: 630 W 720 D 1520/1940 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 80 racks per hour • 3 phase • External Dimensions: 746 W 755 D 1567 H • On Site Warranty

CWC631SDE-1

H857A/WS/DET

• 500mm square basket • Max 40 racks/hr • Class ‘A’ air gap • External Dimensions: 630 W 720 D 1520/1940 H • On Site Warranty

LC1200

This double skinned hood type dishwasher can accept a 600mm or 500mm square basket and also includes an integral water softener. Electronic controls with 7 programmes are capable of an output of up to 72 baskets per hour - perfect for sites dealing with large volumes of crockery on a regular basis. This model also includes an energy saving heat exchange system.

• 600x500mm or 500x500mm basket • Up to 72 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • Double skinned & insulated • External Dimensions: 734 W 760 D 1580/2000 H • On Site Warranty

162

• 500mm square basket • 65 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty


CWC621D-1

H957/DET

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Passthrough Dishwashers & Cutlery Polishers

• 600x500mm or 500x500mm basket • Up to 72 baskets per hour • Electronic controls with 7 programs • External Dimensions: 734 W 760 D 1580/2000 H • On Site Warranty

The Classeq Hydro series is built to perform with simple, clear controls including automatic cycle start. Options are available for WRAS approved machines including Class ‘A’ air gap and automatic clean down cycle. All models are suitable for straight line or corner installation.

• 500mm basket • Max 48 racks/hr • Hot or cold fill • External Dimensions: 720 W 750 D 1470 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • 3 phase • Hot or cold feed • Detergent & rinse aid pumps • External Dimensions: 630 W 720 D 1520/1940 H

C1000E

H957A/DET

C1000EDP

• 500mm basket • Max 55 racks/hr • Internal class ‘A’ air gap • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm square basket • Max 40 racks/hr • Class ‘A’ air gap • External Dimensions: 630 W 720 D 1520/1940 H • On Site Warranty

• 500mm basket • Max 55 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

C1300E

SAM-3001

SAS-5001

• 500mm basket • Max 72 racks/hr • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 625 W 760 D 1460 H • On Site Warranty

• 3000 pieces per hour output • Dries, polishes and removes lime scale • Fully automatic • External Dimensions: 489 W 652 D 412 H • On Site Warranty

• 5000-8000 pieces per hour output • Dries, polishes and removes lime scale • Fully automatic • External Dimensions: 630 W 800 D 783 H • On Site Warranty

• Max 40 racks/hr • 1.5/3 min cycle time • Drain pump • External break tank required • On Site Warranty

Warewashing

C800EDP

163


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Commercial Laundry

Buying Guide

Dirty laundry is an everyday occurrence in foodservice and healthcare environments. In restaurants and hotels, food and drink can stain tablecloths, napkins, sheets and towels. In hospitals and care homes, blood, urine, faeces, antiseptics and medicines stain sheets, gowns and towels, and in all commercial kitchens, stains happen on aprons, tea towels and wash cloths – in every situation stains are frequent and diverse! But with good commercial laundry equipment and quality control practices, all these items can be cleaned hygienically and effectively and be back in service without unsightly marks and without the costly exercise of being disposed of. To effectively disinfect and clean laundry, and ensure infection control, there are four key elements – mechanical action, temperature, time and chemicals. All items must be washed at the correct temperature for a sufficient amount of time to allow the mechanical action to break up soiling, whilst using the correct mix of chemicals. Getting this right will save time and money – rewashing items costs in terms of labour, energy, water and chemicals and stained laundered items reflect badly on an establishment or operation. Our range of heavy duty professional washing machines can handle the toughest of laundry jobs - complement these with professional tumble dryers and rotary irons to make light of this demanding chore. It is important for any business using washing machines to have WRAS (Water Regulations Advisory Scheme) approval. This scheme covers installation and usage of any appliance which uses water from public mains supply and compliance with regulations is a must, as it is a criminal offence to cause waste, misuse, undue consumption or contaminations. All installations have to be granted WRAS approval and we can advise on this accordingly.

Advantages • Intelligent wash programmes that can adapt to how soiled linens are, to then determine how long the wash cycle should be, saving energy. • Machines with highest energy efficiency ratings (A+++) can use up to 40% less electricity. Some have lower levels of water consumption too. • Delayed start feature can allow operators to benefit from cheap electricity tariffs. • Honeycomb drums cushion clothing so fewer creases to deal with afterwards. • Dryers now can handle any type of load, even the most delicate items and with environmentally friendly heat pump technology, drying cycles are more economical, using up to 50% less electricity. • Some machines are stackable, saving valuable space. • Rotary irons speed up this labour intensive job and require no physical effort as heated plates apply ironing pressure – you can even sit down on the job! Some machines can be sited against a wall, making the most of available space.

Buying Tips

164

• What equipment? – Assess the volume of laundry, frequency and type of items washed – many operations underestimate the capacity of the machine they need – it is more cost effective to have a larger capacity than to wash more frequently. Rotary irons have variable roller widths (83cm – 2.1 metre) to take a variety of items – choose larger widths for items such as bed sheets. Look at roller speeds for hourly output. Consider space restrictions – some washing/dryer models can stack to save space and some rotary iron return feed capabilities allow them to be sited against a wall. • Build quality and reliability – Choose leading brands with an established reputation for quality, reliability and current technology. Don’t go for cheap imports or domestic models, they won’t stand up to the demand. Genuine service back-up, spare part availability and warranties are crucial. Check out energy ratings and water consumption – look at overall costs per load. • Operational features – Look for built-in features that save time and energy, programmable models, easy to use controls, auto-dosing of chemicals if required, large porthole door for ease of loading/unloading, programme options for washing cloths and mops if required, variable spin speeds, delay start to set wash time to suit, condenser or vent models for dryers. For rotary irons, look at roller widths and speed settings; variable temperature controls, including selection for various textiles; steam function and return feed capabilities.

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


PW6055DP VARIO

QUICKWASH

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Washing Machines

• 5.5kg capacity • 1400 rpm • Honeycomb drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 725 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

One of our best selling laundry solutions, the QUICKWASH comes from a brand you can trust at an affordable price. Designed for ease of use, simple and clear controls combine with an ‘Automatic Savings’ system which weighs the linen and adjusts the amount of water and energy according to the load. This leads to considerable savings in case the machine is not fully loaded. The QUICKWASH also operates from a 13 amp plug, keeping costs low and installation simple.

• 6kg capacity • 1450 rpm • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 595 W 680 D 850 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 5.5kg capacity • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 595 W 680 D 850 H

PW5064DV

PW6065SSDP VARIO

PW6065DV VARIO

• 6.5kg capacity • Designed for contract cleaning environments • Special programmes for mops & cleaning cloths • External Dimensions: 595 W 715 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 6.5kg capacity • 1400 rpm • Honeycomb drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 725 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 6.5kg capacity • 1400 rpm • Honeycomb drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 725 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

WE170P

AWG812

PW6080DP

• 8kg capacity • Semi commercial • Drain pump • External Dimensions: 597 W 624 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 8kg capacity • 1200rpm spin speed • 10 programs • External Dimensions: 595 W 640 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 8kg capacity • 1300 rpm • Honeycomb drum • External Dimensions: 700 W 727 D 1020 H • On Site Warranty

• 1300 rpm • Stainless steel drum • On Site Warranty

Commercial Laundry

W555HDP

165


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Commercial Laundry

Washing Machines & Tumble Dryers W575HDV

PW6080SSDV

3LMVWC400YW

• 8kg capacity • 1245 rpm • 1 or 3 phase • External Dimensions: 720 W 721 D 1132 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 8kg capacity • 1300 rpm • Honeycomb drum • External Dimensions: 700 W 727 D 1020 H • On Site Warranty

• 10.5kg capacity • 4 wash temperatures • Automatic water level • External Dimensions: 685 W 650 D 1080 H • On Site Warranty

3LWTW5550YW

AWG1212

QUICKDRYV

• 10.5kg capacity • Top loader • 6th Sense® sensor technology • External Dimensions: 685 W 650 D 1080 H • On Site Warranty

• 12kg capacity • Front loader • 1200rpm max spin speed • External Dimensions: 813 W 686 D 1010 H • On Site Warranty

• 5.9kg capacity • Vented • Stainless steel drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 735 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

QUICKDRYC

3LMEDC300YW

• 5.9kg capacity • Condenser • Stainless steel drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 735 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

PT7135C VARIO

New to our range for 2016, this Maytag ‘American Style’ Tumble Dryer has an ample capacity of 10.5kg and uses easy rotary controls. Various programme options allow more delicate items to be handled with care.

• 10.5kg capacity • Auto dry system • Cold air drying up to 30 minutes • 2 programme options • External Dimensions: 685 W 743 D 1100 H

166

• 4 drying temperatures • Timed drying up to 70 minutes • 5 automatic drying programmes • Rotary electromechanical controls • On Site Warranty

• 6.5kg capacity • Honeycomb drum • Condenser system • External Dimensions: 595 W 700 D 850 H • On Site Warranty


PT7136 VARIO

HM1683

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Tumble Dryers & Rotary Irons

• 6.5kg capacity • Honeycomb drum • Vented • External Dimensions: 595 W 700 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

The Miele HM1683 rotary ironer is ideal for ironing workwear and laundry on the smallest of footprints. The ironer has quick heat up times and optimum heat distribution for consistent ironing results, plus a variety of temperature settings to protect delicate garments. Other features include an ample stacking tray and airing bar to allow laundry to cool and continue drying, without creasing. Finally, the HM1683 has a fold away design for ease of storage.

• 7.2kg capacity • Vented • Stainless steel drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 735 D 850 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 160 x 830mm roller • Maximum output of 15kg per hour • External Dimensions: 1050 W 380 D 960 H

T5130C

TE1120

PT7186SS

• 7.2kg capacity • Condenser • Stainless steel drum • External Dimensions: 595 W 735 D 850 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 8kg capacity • Semi commercial • Condenser • External Dimensions: 596 W 625 D 850 H • On Site Warranty

• 8kg capacity • Honeycomb drum • Vented • External Dimensions: 700 W 727 D 1020 H • On Site Warranty

3LWED5500YW

T5190G

HM1680

• 10.5kg capacity • Air vented • 6th Sense® sensor technology • External Dimensions: 786 W 706 D 1090 H • On Site Warranty

• 10.6kg capacity • Vented • Grey & blue finish • External Dimensions: 720 W 724 D 1114 H • NB. 1 Year Labour

• 160 x 850mm roller • 2-4.5 metres per min roller speed (4-9 rpm) • Maximum output of 15kg per hour • External Dimensions: 985 W 380 D 960 H • On Site Warranty

• 2-4.5 metres per min roller speed (4-9 rpm) • Return feed model for simple use • On Site Warranty

Commercial Laundry

T5130V

167


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Hygiene, Storage & Handling

Buying Guide

Food safety and hygiene is an essential part of every professional foodservice business and all food and catering businesses have a legal responsibility to adhere to Food Hygiene Regulations. The law sets out clear HACCP (Hazard Analysis at Critical Control Points) guidelines for the safe production of food, which not only protects the public (your customers), but also protects businesses reputations too. Food safety is about the correct handling, preparation and storage of food to control harmful bacteria, preventing foodborne illnesses. And it relates to all aspects of a business – the premises and personal hygiene of staff too. It’s primarily spread by inadequate cleaning of hands, equipment and surfaces and by cross contamination – most likely when raw food touches (or drips onto) ready to eat, cooked food, equipment or surfaces. Also inadequate pest and waste control. Get it wrong and it can have extremely serious, life threatening results. To overcome these challenges, it is vital to establish good practice, but to do that you need the right equipment and systems in place. Our range provides solutions for all health and hygiene requirements, including: stainless steel tabling to provide adequate workspace to carry out all tasks hygienically; to shelves and racking for storing foods correctly; sink units for food prep and equipment cleaning; hand wash sinks and dryers for personal hygiene; fly killers to help eradicate flying pests; and food transport trolleys and plate stackers for handling food and food waste.

Advantages • A lot of operations pay outside contractors to supply personal washroom equipment and services as it has been seen as a specialist area, however, this equipment is now very affordable, reliable and easy to fit by operators themselves. There are even mobile hand wash sinks available for restricted or remote catering sites or outdoor catering. • Hand dryers, fly killers and storage systems are essentially maintenance free, especially if you choose reputable brands.

Buying Tips We can provide advice on the equipment that will help minimise the risks within an operation, helping with HACCP compliance. • What equipment? – Consider the flow and activity levels within all areas of your kitchen prep and cooking areas, route to storage and plate return/waste area, this will help determine where cross contamination can be kept to a minimum with the correct placement of shelves, workbenches, sinks, plate stackers etc. Choose designs that will minimise dirt traps. • Build quality and reliability – Choose the best you can afford. Look for leading brands with an established reputation for quality, durability and reliability. For pest control and hand dryers, look for current technology and for fly killers, check he longevity of UV tubes. Check the availability and cost of spare parts and the after sales service, plus any warranty periods. The Simply Stainless range comes with a lifetime warranty. • Operational features – For shelving, choose materials best suited for each application i.e. metal for dry foods, plastic coated wire for coldroom or freezer stored goods. Look for adjustable shelves and consider solid or slatted shelving depending on the foods to be stored. For hand dryers, look at the drying times – the higher the output the faster the dry time, noise levels, infra-red sensors and energy saving auto cut-out. For fly killers, look for quality construction, good square metre coverage, easy installation, easy to clean and safety features. For front of house siting, look for stylish, discreet designs.

168

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


MEX25W

MEX50SS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Fly Killers & Hand Dryers

• 40 M² coverage • Easy to clean, robust & efficient • Can be table, ceiling or wall mounted • External Dimensions: 360 W 140 D 260 H • Workshop Warranty

The Maestrowave ‘MEX’ range of fly killers has been ‘The Professional’s Choice’ for many years, offering a heavy duty and durable solution. The range includes models offering coverage from 40 M² to 110 M², all available in either white or stainless steel.

• 40 M² coverage • Easy to clean, robust & efficient • Can be table, ceiling or wall mounted • External Dimensions: 360 W 140 D 260 H • Workshop Warranty

• 80 M² coverage • Can be table, ceiling or wall mounted • External Dimensions: 510 W 140 D 260 H

FB26

MEX50W

MEX75W

• 80 M² coverage • 2x 13W eco bulbs • Hygienic glueboard application • External Dimensions: 310 W 90 D 300 H • Exchange Warranty

• 80 M² coverage • Easy to clean, robust & efficient • Can be table, ceiling or wall mounted • External Dimensions: 510 W 140 D 260 H • Workshop Warranty

• 110 M² coverage • Easy to clean, robust & efficient • Can be table, ceiling or wall mounted • External Dimensions: 660 W 140 D 260 H • Workshop Warranty

FB52

UDP1

UDP1SS

• 160 M² coverage • 4x 13W eco bulbs • Hygienic glueboard application • External Dimensions: 500 W 90 D 300 H • Exchange Warranty

• Infrared automatic operation • 25 second approx drying time • Chromed swivel nozzle • External Dimensions: 270 W 200 D 240 H • Workshop Warranty

• Infrared automatic operation • 25 second approx drying time • Chromed swivel nozzle • External Dimensions: 270 W 200 D 240 H • Workshop Warranty

• Easy to clean, robust & efficient • Safety switch for quick & easy tray removal • Workshop Warranty

Hygiene, Storage & Handling

MEX25SS

169


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Hygiene, Storage & Handling

Hand Wash Basins & Shelving/Racking WS2X

WS2L

4ZIM900500

• Comes complete with cross head taps • 240 x 135mm bowl • External Dimensions: 305 W 270 D 140 H • Parts Only

• Comes complete with 3” lever taps • Shown with cross head taps • 240 x 135mm bowl • External Dimensions: 305 W 270 D 140 H • Parts Only

• 4 tier • Bright zinc chromate finish • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 900 W 500 D 1675 H • Workshop Warranty

4NYM1200400

4ZIM1200600

4ZIM1500600

• 4 tier • Silver grey nylon coated finish • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 1200 W 400 D 1675 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 tier • Bright zinc chromate finish • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 1200 W 600 D 1675 H • Workshop Warranty

• 4 tier • Bright zinc chromate finish • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 1500 W 600 D 1675 H • Workshop Warranty

4NYM1800600

SS17 SHELVING/RACKING

• 4 tier • Silver grey nylon coated finish • Adjustable feet • External Dimensions: 1800 W 600 D 1675 H • Workshop Warranty

From standard 4 tier racking, to specially designed tilted defrost shelving, Simply Stainless have a range of racking solutions to suit every user. Available in a range of sizes and constructed from solid Stainless Steel at an affordable price. SS17 • 4 tier • Fully adjustable • Available in 900mm, 1200mm, 1500mm wide

170

SS17DF • 4 tier with tilted defrost shelves • Fully adjustable • Available in 900mm or 1200mm wide

For our full range of Fabrications see pages 42-47...


ETDT100N

SS14/15/16 TROLLEYS

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Trolleys, Platestackers & Display Baskets

• Tray dispense unit • 100 tray capacity • Accepts 545 x 385mm trays • External Dimensions: 603 W 509 D 790 H • Workshop Warranty

Part of the Simply Stainless Modular Fabrication range, a range of trolleys suitable for serving or clearing - from 2 tier to 16 tier. General use and bakery specific options are available, all available for Free Next Day Delivery! Contact our Sales Team for a quote... • 2 tier • For general purpose use • Fully welded • External Dimensions: 821 W 571 D 1000 H • Workshop Warranty

• SS14 - 2 tier, Complete with castors and push bar, External Dimensions: 800 W 500 D 900 H • SS15 - 3 tier, Top quality no. 4 finish, External Dimensions: 800 W 500 D 900 H • SS16 - 18 level, Gastronorm compatible, External Dimensions: 377 W 570 D 1650 H • SS16-2/1 - 18 level, 2/1 Gastronorm compatible, External Dimensions: 581 W 680 D 1650 H • SS16BT - 18 level, Accepts 600x400mm bakery trays, External Dimensions: 460 W625 D 1800 H • SS16BTI - 18 level, Accepts 460x660mm bakery trays, External Dimensions: 520 W 650 D 1800 H

RSE11-Z

TCT1/10

WM6

• 3 tier • For general purpose use • Fully welded • External Dimensions: 821 W 571 D 1000 H • Workshop Warranty

• 10 level • Accepts 10 x 460x360mm trays • 110mm pitch • External Dimensions: 485 W 578 D 1343 H • Workshop Warranty

• 6 plate capacity • Wall mounted • Ideal for storing plated food • External Dimensions: 70 W 45 D 570 H • Workshop Warranty

TM48

BW48-C

TMHR3L

• 48 plate capacity • Table mounted • Ideal for storing plated food • External Dimensions: 360 W 360 D 1140 H • Workshop Warranty

• 48 plate capacity • Folds away when not in use • Adjustable for different size plates & dishes • External Dimensions: 650 W 480 D 1270 H • Workshop Warranty

• Countertop • Chrome plated mild steel • 3 basket, 3 tier display baskets • External Dimensions: 400 W 385 D 824 H • Workshop Warranty

Hygiene, Storage & Handling

RSE9-Z

171


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Commercial Cleaning

Buying Guide

The importance of keeping your establishment or operation clean is obvious… on the surface! But doing it effectively can have its challenges. And in terms of removing allergens, germs and pollutants that we can’t see, the job becomes even more of a test. Exceptional cleaning performance from versatile machines designed to work in any commercial environment are what is required. Powerful commercial vacuum cleaners with a high level of suction will pick-up dust and dirt, however in some environments such as foodservice and healthcare, it is essential to stop the smaller particles of dust and allergens re-entering the air and vacuums developed with HEPA filters inside will help eradicate this. A vacuum with a proper HEPA filter will channel virtually all of the dirty airstream through the filter, if it doesn’t, it’s simply rearranging dirt! A genuine HEPA filter is much more hygienic than an ordinary one because it will stop mold spores and even some bacteria and viruses. When vacuuming alone is not enough to remove dirt and stains from carpets, then carpet washers are the answer, these machines can spot wash, everyday wash or deep clean lifting stains you can and can’t see in the pile. And for hard floors and surfaces that need a hygienic clean and sanitisation, steam cleaners can do the job without the need for chemicals.

Advantages • Some vacuum models have advanced filtration and energy efficiency for a better performance and more effective clean. • Lightweight models of vacuum available for ease of portability and models with lower noise levels for quiet operation, allowing the vacuums to be used almost anywhere. • Steam cleaners can be extremely versatile, not just cleaning floors, but cleaning taps, tiles, windows and any hard surface and can switch from steam cleaning to extraction of liquids.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Look at the surface area and the types of surfaces to be cleaned (hard floor or carpet) to determine the capacity and style of vacuum – i.e. upright or cylinder model. Similarly for carpet washers to ascertain capacity required and consider whether it is for spot washing and removing stains or whether a larger capacity model would be best for deep cleaning. If there is an extensive area of hard surfaces to clean and hygienically, as in healthcare environments, choose a steam cleaner. • Build quality and reliability – Look for sturdy and durable manufacture, reliable, energy efficient models with exceptional operational productivity. Choose a leading brand known for its cleaning equipment and genuine HEPA filters, they are worth the investment. Look at after sales service and check the availability of spare parts and any useful accessories, plus the cost of replacements features. Go for lightweight, yet stable models for easier mobility. Check the warranty periods. • Operational features – On vacuum cleaners, look for: A-rated, HEPA filtration to reduce airborne particles and produce an outstanding cleaning performance; anti-topple stability; long, high visibility cables; variety of on-board tools; quiet operation; carpet and hard floor cleaning capability and dust bag capacity. On carpet washers, look for: large capacity tanks; time saving multi-directional cleaning; excellent extraction to ensure carpets dry quickly; on-board tools, including agitating wash tool brushes and hose. On steam cleaners, look for: quick heat up and continuous steam; variable steam control; extensive set of tools for cleaning a wide range of appliances and surfaces.

172

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


VCST01

VCC10

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Vacuum & Steam Cleaners, Carpet Washers & Scrubber Dryers

• Steam cleans, vacuums and sucks up wet spills • 1200W motor • 1700W heater • External Dimensions: 550 W 395 D 505 H • Workshop Warranty

• 900W motor • Wide 28.5cm cleaning path • Clean Surge™ for stubborn stains • External Dimensions: 290 W 500 D 1150 H • Workshop Warranty

Rated C overall for energy consumption, the VCC10 has an excellent pick up - rated C on carpets and A on hard floors - so you’ll remove even more dirt as you clean. It’s also ultra-lightweight at just 4.5kg, yet has excellent stability, so it won’t topple if it’s quickly pulled around corners or furniture. With a long, high-vis power cable so you can keep cleaning without unplugging. The VCC10 is ideal for cleaning small to medium areas.

• 1200W motor • Cylinder • External Dimensions: 350 W 340 D 370 H

• 9 litre bag capacity • Powerful suction - 200 air watts • Workshop Warranty

VCSD01

VCW02

Commercial Cleaning

VCW04

• Mains powered • 400W vacuum motor • 370W brush motor • External Dimensions: 800 W 560 D 790 H • Workshop Warranty

VCSD02

Lightweight and portable with on-board tools for one-handed carrying, the VCW02 carpet washer from Vax Commercial is perfect for picking up spills and removing tough stains. Agitating wash tool brushes and carpet cleaning solution break down and remove stubborn dirt, leaving carpets spot-free and rooms smelling fresh.

• 350W motor • 1.7 litre clean water capacity • External Dimensions: 320 W 250 D 440 H

• Portable and lightweight carpet washer • 1 litre dirty water capacity • Workshop Warranty

• Battery powered • 250W vacuum motor • 250W brush motor • External Dimensions: 800 W 560 D 790 H • Workshop Warranty

173


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Cash Registers

Buying Guide

Having an efficient payment system in place for a business is not only good practice, but is advantageous for customers, owners and managers too. Day to day running can be much easier, the service more efficient and profits boosted as a result. There is a whole plethora of technology available, which is still developing, from digital apps to modern EPOS and cashless payment systems. However not every business is in a position to adopt this up to the minute technology or for some, it is not even a suitable option. Business efficiency and profitability can be enhanced by even the most basic of cash registers or entry level EPOS system. Simple and affordable, cash registers have a surprising number of features that can enhance business performance, some can act as electronic journals, helping to audit product lines and aid in stock control and sales analysis. Helping significantly to improve order taking, stock takes, table turns and reservations, EPOS systems (Electronic Point of Sale) are the next step up and can make businesses even more efficient with orders going straight through to the kitchen. We can advise on entry level and more bespoke sophisticated solutions.

Advantages • Easy programming of PLU’s and price entry on cash registers can help reduce operator error and potential losses. • Some tills can even allow for SD cards or have a USB port to provide connection to various devices including kitchen printers, bar code scanners and computers for data back-up. • End of day reconciliation to the cash drawer and hourly turnover sales data for constant management monitoring are possible on some models. • With EPOS, software modules can include PoS, reservations and waiting list management, perpetual inventory management and kitchen display system to aid faster service.

Buying Tips • What equipment? – Assess your real needs in line with your current business and service requirements. Ensure you explore the full capabilities of cash registers before considering EPOS options. If you determine EPOS is the route, be clear about what you want the system to do and consider its integration with any existing PC based systems. Ascertain whether the system is easy to learn, simple to use and adaptable to changing business needs. Look for Chip & Pin and Weights & Measures approval. • Build quality and reliability – Choose the best you can afford – ideally a leading brand known for such systems expertise. Look at the reliability and after sales service. Check the availability of technical support plus access to maintenance engineers in case of equipment failure. Ascertain warranty period. • Operational features – Look for easy to install, easy to programme solutions. For cash registers, look for stylish, compact designs with PLU’s for automatic price entry; lockable cash drawers, separate bill/cash compartments; bright and clear display; battery backup for memory; reliable and quiet thermal printer for receipts and journal printing of stored lines and sales; hard wearing keys; customisable receipts and on/off option; 2-3 methods of payment; currency conversion; percent discount facility. For EPOS, check software modules available and possible integration with other packages – including accounts, inventory and payroll.

174

Key to icons Light Duty Designed for commercial use in a less busy environment Medium Duty Strongly constructed to perform in a busy situation Heavy Duty High standard of build to provide good service under heavy use Extra Heavy Duty High powered, fast throughput with the highest standard of build 13 Amp Plug and go! Hardwired Hard wiring required Gas Stainless Steel Construction Warranty


XEA107B

XEA107

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Cash Registers

• 8 departments • 80 PLUs • Key activated mode switch • External Dimensions: 335 W 360 D 190 H • On Site Warranty

The XEA107 is the perfect entry level cash register for a wide range of foodservice applications. With a large LED display, easy to use keyboard and basic printer for customer receipts, this simple to use model offers all requirements for smaller operations. Fully lockable and compact for storage, up to 8 departments and 80 PLUs can be easily stored.

• 8 departments • 200 PLUs • 3000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 335 W 360 D 190 H • On Site Warranty

• 8 departments • Key activated mode switch • External Dimensions: 335 W 360 D 190 H

XEA137B

XEA207W

XEA207B

• 8 departments • 200 PLUs • 3000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 335 W 360 D 190 H • On Site Warranty

• 99 departments • 2000 PLUs • 9000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 420 W 355 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

• 99 departments • 2000 PLUs • 9000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 420 W 355 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

XEA217W

XEA217B

XEA307

• 99 departments • 2000 PLUs • 9000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 420 W 355 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

• 99 departments • 2000 PLUs • 9000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 420 W 355 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

• 99 departments • 10,000 PLUs • 9000 line electronic journal • External Dimensions: 420 W 355 D 237 H • On Site Warranty

• 80 PLUs • Light grey finish • On Site Warranty

Cash Registers

XEA137W

175


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Domestic Appliances To complement our extensive range of commercial foodservice equipment, we have put together a comprehensive range of domestic appliances, all from top brand manufacturers. These appliances are ideally suited to non-professional catering applications - for example use in proprietor accommodation, staff rooms and student accommodation - where heavy duty equipment is not always necessary. The brands that we have selected all have a reputation for high quality and reliability, are always looking to improve their product offering and have many years of experience behind them. We are able to offer Built In, Integrated and Freestanding appliances, with a wide range of products available, including: Microwaves, Ovens, Hobs, Extraction, Dishwashers, Laundry, Refrigeration and much more... Choosing the right equipment As with choosing any equipment, consider your current and future needs - what volumes do you expect the appliance to cope with and how often? How much space is available? Do you require built in or freestanding appliances? Are you working to an overall design theme, or is functionality the priority? What budget is available? Always be clear and realistic on your specific needs. Take a close look at the build quality - don’t be fooled by the host of cheaper imports available. Always choose a leading brand as they will have established a good reputation for quality, reliability and genuine service back up, plus availability of spare parts. Domestic appliances don’t need to withstand the same rigours as commercial equipment, but nevertheless you get what you pay for and it is well worth investing in the top brand names for peace of mind.

Domestic Appliances

Our Sales Team are able to advise on the latest options available from each manufacturer and provide a quote to meet your needs. Builders and contract packs are also available on request. For any domestic requirements, call the Sales Team on 01296 663400 or email sales@rhhall.com

Our vast knowledge of microwave technology does not exclude Domestic models. With outputs of 800W to 1000W available, we have both standard microwave only and combination microwave models available. Our team can advise on the vast range of features available on modern microwaves, to ensure the right model is supplied for your needs.

Offering both freestanding and built in products, Siemens have a reputation for outstanding innovation. Perfect for modern style kitchens and those requiring the latest technology.

176


With over 100 years experience, Miele appliances are specifically tested to ensure a long life. Technology and design also play a strong part in this global brand, making Miele appliances perfect for high end kitchens.

Domestic Appliances

Smeg have been supplying premium appliances throughout the UK for over 20 years and every product is created with a strong focus on design. Products such as their FAB 50’s style refrigeration have become truly iconic.

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Domestic Appliances

Neff have a wide range of built in and integrated appliances, with innovative features designed to change the way you use your kitchen and make easy work of cooking.

177


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Contact Us

Team RH Hall

Our growing team look forward to serving your foodservice needs with passion, knowledge and dedication, with proactive customer service at all times. Our commitment is no less than 100% and we aim to become the most trusted foodservice equipment supplier in the UK – only you can judge us on that! At your service… These are our Key Contacts for all day to day enquiries - all staff profiles can be viewed at www.rhhall.com

Contact Us

Ray Hall Managing Director ray.hall@rhhall.com

Kris Brearley Sales Director kris.brearley@rhhall.com

Tom Caine Area Manager (North & Scotland) tom.caine@rhhall.com 07855 818380

Jerry Dutton National Account Manager jerry.dutton@rhhall.com 07966 232982

Derek Poole Area Manager (South) derek.poole@rhhall.com 07973 163294

Nick Sanders Area Manager (Midlands & Wales) nick.sanders@rhhall.com 07855 818379

Emma Brown Commercial Sales emma.brown@rhhall.com

Kerryanne Newton Lorraine Henson Commercial Sales Commercial Sales lorraine.henson@rhhall.com kerryanne.newton@rhhall.com

Duncan Vipas Sales & Purchasing Manager duncan.vipas@rhhall.com 07813 722567

Tracey Guinan Commercial Sales (National Account Division) tracey.guinan@rhhall.com

Chris O’Neill Head of Food Solutions chris.oneill@rhhall.com 07791 316820

Kirsty Maguire Commercial Sales kirsty.maguire@rhhall.com

Sophie Hill Commercial Sales (National Account Division) sophie.hill@rhhall.com

Janet Caveney Sales Development Executive janet.caveney@rhhall.com 07951 498146

Sue Simpson Commercial Sales sue.simpson@rhhall.com

Emma Smith Marketing & Systems Manager emma.smith@rhhall.com

Francesca Jeavons Steph Disspain Heather Houghton Tracy Barry Tina Ransome Imane Malguitou Service Admin Manager Finance & Admin Manager Credit Controller Customer Service Team Leader Customer Service Customer Service francesca.jeavons@rhhall.com tina.ransome@rhhall.com stephanie.disspain@rhhall.com (Key Accounts) imane.malguitou@rhhall.com tracy.barry@rhhall.com heather.houghton@rhhall.com

Megan Hall Credit Controller megan.hall@rhhall.com

Gary East Senior Service Engineer

178

Gill Jarman Purchase Ledger Clerk gill.jarman@rhhall.com

Steve Brackley Service Engineer

Yvonne Kyne Spares Supervisor yvonne.kyne@rhhall.com

Francis Greene Service Engineer

Ben Ward Spares Assistant ben.ward@rhhall.com

Kevin Shepherd General Manager (Fabrications) kevin.shepherd@rhhall.com 07904 637778

Ray Copper Michael Harvey Service Manager Warehouse Manager michael.harvey@rhhall.com ray.copper@rhhall.com

Adam Hall Bespoke Solutions Manager (Fabrications & Simply Stainless) adam.hall@rhhall.com 07725 087879

John Lancashire Works & Production Manager (Fabrications) john.lancashire@rhhall.com


We are always pleased to welcome our customers - either at our HQ or Factory. Whether your visit is for a meeting to further discuss your requirements, collect an urgent order, meet our enthusiastic team or use our Development Kitchen for product testing - we invite you to pay us a visit. Please contact us to arrange an appointment!

R H Hall (Microwave) Ltd Hallco House Beacon Court Pitstone Green Business Park Pitstone Bedfordshire LU7 9GY

R H Hall Fabrication Services Unit 3 1 Northbridge Road Berkhamsted Hertfordshire HP4 1EF

Email: info@rhhall.com Telephone: 01296 663400 Fax: 01296 663401 Web: www.rhhall.com

Email: fabs@rhhall.com Telephone: 01442 877888 Fax: 01442 877862 Web: www.rhhallfabrications.com

Contact Us

Visit us

T: 01296 663 400 E: sales@rhhall.com W: www.rhhall.com

Contact Us

Trading with Halls THE R H HALL FAIR PRICE PLEDGE

R H Hall will not be knowingly undersold by any comparable Catering Equipment Supplier. Contact our Sales Office for further information.

HOW TO ORDER

Goods may be ordered by telephone, e-mail, fax, post or via our web shop at www.rhhall.com Please quote your official order number and clearly identify your requirements giving Make & Model Numbers as shown in our catalogue, price list or web shop. If you have any special instructions regarding delivery, these should also be stated.

HOW TO PAY

By Credit Account, Credit Card, Switch, BACS, CHAPS, Bankers Draft, Company Cheque (Subject to Clearance). Our web shop offers a convenient & secure payment method using Verisign® which guards you against credit card fraud. If you would like to open a Credit Account, please contact our Credit Control Department or your Area Sales Manager.

DELIVERY

Providing that your order has been received and payment method has been accepted before 12 noon Monday to Friday, goods, where requested will be despatched for the next working day. Delivery is free of charge providing the order value is over £150.00 nett or unless previously stated on acceptance of order.

If the order value is below £150.00 nett, a delivery charge of £10.00 will be made. Pre 9.00am, Pre 10.30am and before Noon delivery services are available, rates are available on request. Please note:- Free of charge, next day delivery carrier service is not available in certain areas and for certain larger products e.g. Highlands and Gram refrigeration. Please check with our Sales Department for any affected areas and products.

DAMAGES & SHORTAGES

Before signing for goods, please ensure all items are physically checked & inspected at time of delivery. Carrier claims for shortages and/or damages cannot be accepted unless reported & signed for accordingly at time of delivery. If any goods are delivered damaged/short, please ensure our Customer Service Department is informed in writing immediately.

SERVICE

We provide excellent after sales service on all models we supply. In the event of breakdown please telephone our Service Department quoting the following:Make - Model - Fault Detail Customer Name Address and Telephone Number.

If the appliance is within the guarantee period we also need to know:Serial Number - Date of purchase - Our Supply Invoice Number. SERVICE CALLS CANNOT BE ACCEPTED WITHOUT THE ABOVE DETAILS.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATION & AVAILABILITY

In the interest of continued improvement, products detailed may differ in specification or appearance, from their description or illustration in our catalogue due to improvements and/or modifications made during the course of, or following the printing of our catalogue. Please check with our sales office prior to purchase, that the product you intend to purchase is in fact as indicated in our catalogue. If it is not, then we will be happy to give details of any improvement and/or modifications made to the product concerned. Furthermore, the contents of our catalogue are not to be treated as representative as to the current availability of the product as described, or as to product actually for sale.

WEEE DIRECTIVE

We are pleased to confirm that all R H Hall key brands are 100% WEEE compliant. Please see www.rhhall.com for full details.

179


For more information call: 01296 663 400 or visit: www.rhhall.com

Index Ambient Display Atmospheric Steamer Auto Fill Boiler Bain Marie Bakery Trolley Banquet Cart Bar Blender Bar System Barbecue Beer Dispenser Bespoke Equipment Blast Chiller/Freezer Blender

101, 103 19 141-148 64-66 47, 171 92 81-82, 135 135-136 70-71 129, 137 4-7, 42-43 121

Bar Kitchen Stick

81-82, 135 79 79-81

Boiler

Auto Fill Manual Fill

Bottle Cooler

Index by Product Type

Top Loading Undercounter

128, 137 125-128, 136-137

Bratt Pan Can Opener Carpet Washer Carvery Cash Register Cavity Protection System Centre Table Char Grill Chest Freezer Chip Scuttle Chipper Cigarette Bin Clearing Trolley Coffee Espresso Machine Coffee Grinder Coffee Machine Coffee Percolator Coffee/Chocolate Machine Cold Server Combination Microwave Combination Steamer Conveyor Oven Conveyor Toaster Cook & Hold Oven Counter Freezer Counter Fridge Cutlery Polisher Defrost Shelving Dishwash Table Dishwasher Passthrough Undercounter

Display

Basket Cabinet Freezer Fridge

Multideck Serveover Domestic Appliances Drinks Dispenser Drinks Mixer Fabrication Bespoke Modular

Fly Killer Food Carrier Food Processor Food Solutions Food Warmer Freezer

180

141-148 139-141

Counter Chest Glass Door Tabletop Undercounter Upright

37 83 173 97 175 11 45, 47 35-36, 55 121-122 53 77 71 47, 171 150-152 152 148-152 148 149-150 66 9 19-20 41 62-63 93 120-121 117-119 163 47, 170 46, 161 160-163 157-160

171 101-104 124 101-102, 104-107, 123

106-107 105-106 176-177 150, 153 82, 135 42-43 45-47

169 93 77-78 4-7, 12-13, 98-99 94-95 120-121 121-122 124 113 113-114 114-117

Fridge

Counter Glass Door Medical Tabletop Undercounter Upright

117-119 123 133 109 109 109-113

Front of House Cooking 40 Froster 128-129, 137 Fryer 30-33, 50-52 Glasswasher 155-157 Grater 84 Griddle 33-34, 40, 54-55 Grill BBQ Char Contact Panini Salamander

70-71 35-36, 55 10, 40-41, 57-60 10, 40-41, 57-60 36-37, 56-57

Hamburger Press 85 Hand Dryer 169 Hand Wash Sink 71, 170 Heated Display 102-103, 107 High Speed Grill 10, 41 Hob 28-29, 49 Hog Roast 71 Holding Cabinet 93 Hot Cupboard 90-92 Hot Dog Equipment 67 Ice Cream Machine 123 Ice Cream Merchandiser 122-123 Ice Crusher 82-83, 135 Ice Maker 129-132, 135-136 Ice Shaver 83 Induction Hob 29, 40, 49 Innovations 4-7, 12-13, 98-99 Juice Dispenser 153 Juicer 83, 135 Kettle 139 Kitchen Blender 79 Knife Sharpener 83 Lamp Unit 96-97 Laundry 165-167 Manual Fill Boiler 139-141 Medical Refrigeration 133 Merchandiser Tabletop Ice Cream Undercounter Upright

Microwave Oven Barcode Combination Commercial Domestic

Microwave Bracket/Shelf Mincer Mini Bar Mixer Modular Fabrication Multideck Oven Bake Off/Catering Conveyor Pizza Potato Range

123 122-123 123 124 12-13 9 10-11 176

11, 47 85 129, 136 73-74 45-47 106-107 15-18 41 21 22 23-26

Oven Range 23-26 Oven Stand 47 Overshelf 46 Panini/Contact Grill 10, 40-41, 57-60 Passthrough Dishwasher 160-163 Pasta Boiler 33, 53 Pasta Maker 84 Patisserie Cabinet 105 Pharmacy Fridge 133 Pizza Display 96 Pizza Oven 21 Pizza Prep Counter 119-120

Plate Dispenser Plate Warmer Platestacker Popcorn Maker Potato Oven Potato Peeler Prover Racking Refrigerated Dispenser Refrigerated Display Refrigeration Rice Cooker Rice Warmer Rotary Iron Salad Bar Salamander Bench Scales Scrubber Dryer Serveover Serving Trolley Shelving/Racking Sink Single Double Hand Wash

Slicer Slush Machine Soup Dispenser Soup Kettle Soup Server Sous Vide Steam Cleaner Steamer Atmospheric Combination

Stick Blender Tabletop Freezer Tabletop Fridge Tabletop Merchandiser Thermal Circulator Thermometer Toaster Bread Bun Combi Contact Conveyor

Top Loading Bottle Cooler Trolleys Tumble Dryer Undercounter Bottle Cooler Undercounter Dishwasher Undercounter Freezer Undercounter Fridge Undercounter Merchandiser Upright Freezer Upright Fridge Upright Merchandiser Urn Vacuum Cleaner Vacuum Packer Vario Cooking Centre Veg Prep Machine Waffle Machine Wall Bench Wall Cupboard Wall Shelf Warewashing Ward Fridge Warming Drawer Washing Machine Waste Disposal Water Bath Water Boiler Auto Fill Manual Fill

Water Cooler Wine Cooler

94 94 171 67 22 76-77 18 47, 170 153 101-107 109-133 68 68 167 97 47 86-88 173 105-106 47, 171 47, 170 46 46 71, 170

84 153 98-99 68, 98-99 98-99 67 173 19 19-20

79-81 113 109 123 67 85 61 62 62 60 62-63

128, 137 47, 171 166-167 125-127, 136-137 158-160 113-114 109 123 114-117 109-113 124-125 139-141 173 86 39 75-76 60 45 46 46 155-163 133 93 165-166 88 67 141-148 139-141

152-153 125, 137


R H HALL FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT CATALOGUE

RH Hall are a UK based manufacturer of bespoke foodservice fabrications. National distributor of all leading foodservice equipment brands & sole United Kingdom & Eire distributor for:

Providing Equipment Solutions for the entire Foodservice Industry R H Hall (Microwave) Ltd Hallco House Beacon Court Pitstone Green Business Park Pitstone Bedfordshire LU7 9GY Email: info@rhhall.com Telephone: 01296 663400 Fax: 01296 663401 Web: www.rhhall.com

Foodservice Equipment Catalogue Edition 25

EDITION 25

R H Hall Foodservice Equipment - Catalogue Edition 25 (2016)  

R H Hall - Catalogue Edition 25 (2016)

R H Hall Foodservice Equipment - Catalogue Edition 25 (2016)  

R H Hall - Catalogue Edition 25 (2016)